Jeep 2011, Liberty, Liberty 2011, Grand Cherokee, 2011 Grand Cherokee Owner's manual

Jeep 2011, Liberty, Liberty 2011, Grand Cherokee, 2011 Grand Cherokee Owner's manual
2011 Grand Cherokee
2011
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
11WK741-126-AB
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Grand Cherokee
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
291680.ps 11JK72-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 05/14/2010 06:18:00
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
䡵 Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 8
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4 INTRODUCTION
and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles
on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve
with experience. When driving off-road or working the
vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to
overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe
federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you
This is a specialized utility vehicle, it can go places and
drive.
perform tasks for which conventional two-wheel drive
enclosed vehicles were not intended. It handles and As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
with your vehicle.
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s read these publications carefully. Following the instrucManual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, tions and recommendations in this manual will help
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for
on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving
or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel
drive vehicle.
INTRODUCTION 5
NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
injury. Drive carefully.
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
Rollover Warning Label
1
6 INTRODUCTION
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts
provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact,
the U.S. government notes that the universal use of
existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling
injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 7
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
label located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of
your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Remote Open Window Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 26
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 29
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
䡵 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
䡵 Liftgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
▫ Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . 53
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 57
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 57
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 59
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints
(AHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 74
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 95
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Seatbelt Lock Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 67
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
▫ Advanced Front Airbag Features . . . . . . . . . . 70
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of
which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the detented ON/RUN position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And NOTE: With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, the ElecOperating” for further information.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display the
ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle on
the driver’s side should the battery in the vehicle or the
RKE transmitter go dead. The emergency key is also for
locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
the theft alarm armed, will result in the alarm sounding.
Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is dead)
into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
then pull the key out with your other hand.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
• If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the
shift lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch. If this occurs, rotate the key
to the right slightly, then remove the Key Fob as
described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap
Emergency Key Removal
the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
and stopped, but the Key Fob cannot be removed until
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
you obtain service.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
• The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
CAUTION!
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in
this condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob
or ignition module. Only remove the emergency
key for locking and unlocking the doors.
• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.
• Contact your dealer for assistance on how
to remove the Key Fob using the manual
over ride method.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key
Fob in the ignition or Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, opening the driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed in
ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped) will cause the reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
The system uses the factory-mated Key Fob with Remote Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition possible by an authorized dealer.
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
CAUTION!
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatsystem will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN posi- problems and loss of security protection.
tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
is one that has never been programmed.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
CAUTION!
the authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• With Keyless Enter-N-Go, always remember to
place the ignition in OFF.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided subject to the following conditions:
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is • This device may not cause harmful interference.
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• This device must accept any interference that may be one should go off in the future, you will need to know
received, including interference that may cause unde- which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
sired operation.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors, disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
liftgate, liftgate flipper glass, and ignition for unauthor- horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
ized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
switches for door locks, power liftgate and flipper glass rearm itself.
are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both To Arm The System
audio and visual signals, the horn will sound, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash repeat- Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
edly for three minutes. If the disturbance is still present The alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless
(driver’s door, passenger door, other doors, ignition) after Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate, or
three minutes, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn when you use the power door lock switch while the door
is open. After all the doors are locked and closed, the
signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
Vehicle Security Light (located in the instrument cluster)
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ- will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the
ent. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this 16 second
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case arming period, opening any door or the liftgate will
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
cancel the arming. If the Vehicle Security Alarm success- To Disarm The System
fully arms, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
slower rate to indicate the alarm is set.
To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need to
press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
Press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button until the turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. If
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) indicates something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
that the vehicle ignition is “OFF” (refer to “Starting your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
information). Then either press the power door LOCK The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
switch while the driver or passenger door is open, press vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
the lock button on the front driver or passenger door Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
handle with a valid key fob in range, or press the Remote remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter LOCK button (refer to transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Start- (after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit,
ing Your Vehicle” for further information).
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm. You may also accidentally sound the
Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
with the key and then opening the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter,
pull on the front driver or passenger door handle (refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information) with a valid
key fob in range, or press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/
Stop button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the
vehicle), or insert a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch
(if the Start/Stop button is removed) and rotate it to the
ON/RUN position.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights come on when you open any door or
use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock any door. They will remain on for approximately
30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off.
The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition
after you close all the doors. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob
with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors, on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Key Fob with Four-Button RKE Transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE
transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry
feature. The horn chirp feature can be turned on or off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for Remote Open Window Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
further information.
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button Programming Additional Transmitters
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
lower completely.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lamps will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
housing or the printed circuit board.
second time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you turn the
ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lamps
and horn will remain on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of
the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Separating RKE Transmitter
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the proved by the party responsible for compliance could
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
distance, check for these two conditions:
engine will remote start:
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
• Shift lever in PARK
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station •
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
•
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
•
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- •
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate/Flipper Glass closed
Hazard switch off
niently from outside the vehicle while still • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
maintaining security. The system has a range of
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto- • Battery at an acceptable charge level
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema- cycle.
turely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE:
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
vehicle will start and then shutdown in 10 seconds.
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
Remote Start mode.
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
• For security, power window and power sunroof opbutton for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
Start request.
in the Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
third cycle.
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
ON/RUN position.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Insert
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
Key and Turn To Run” will display in the EVIC until
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
you insert the key. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go feaCenter (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
ture, the message “Push Start Button” will display in
Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle
the EVIC until you push the START button.
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel”.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
knob. If the lock knob is down when the door is closed,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave unattended children in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each front door the ignition switch and the driver’s door is open, the
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
If this feature is selected, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph
(24 km/h) and all doors are closed. This feature will reset
whenever a door is opened.
This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
Power Door Lock Switch
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door information.
will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
• If a passive entry door handle has not been used for
72 hours, the passive entry feature for the handle may
time out. Pulling the deactivated front door handle
will reactivate the door handle’s passive entry feature.
2
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the passive entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If you unlock the doors using the passive entry door
handles, but do NOT pull the handle, the doors will
automatically lock after 60 seconds.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
present in the ignition.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
have been closed, the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected outside
the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on
the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the button on the right side of
the chrome accent bar, which is located on the liftgate
below the flipper glass to lock or unlock the vehicle.
Liftgate Passive Entry Button
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the button
on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is
programmed in EVIC, the liftgate and Flipper glass will
unlock when you press the button on the liftgate For
further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
the outside of the handle.
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either passive entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The passive entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
Outside Door Handle Lock Button
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door and rear doors which operate the front
passenger and rear passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
2
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch or leave a vehicle with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
The power window switches remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road condiTo open the window part way, press to the first detent
tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
and release it when you want the window to stop.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to Window Lockout Button
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually. The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
WARNING!
disable the window controls on the rear doors, press the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
press the Window Lockout button again.
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle and lift.
Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger
or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate.
Liftgate Release
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Liftgate Flipper Glass
The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the
liftgate is unlocked. To open the flipper glass, push up on
the window switch located on the liftgate.
Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened, connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted, preventing
activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass
is open.
NOTE: If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should
occur, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to
open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can
be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the
liftgate trim panel.
WARNING!
Liftgate Glass Release
Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pulling
up on the liftgate handle or by pressing the
LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. Press the LIFTGATE button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds, to open
the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pressing the
button twice within five seconds a second time will close
the liftgate.
To operate the power liftgate manually in the open
direction, pull the liftgate handle once to initiate a power
cycle and then pull the handle a second time to put
liftgate into manual mode.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC) and the liftgate
chime will be audible. For further information, refer to
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by ⬙Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)/
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)⬙ in ⬙Underoverhead console, or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE standing Your Instrument Panel⬙.
button located on left rear trim, near the liftgate opening.
NOTE: In the event of a power malfunction to the
Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim
liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to
once will close the liftgate only, this button cannot be
open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can
used to open the liftgate.
be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the
liftgate trim panel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
button to operate. If the liftgate is not fully open, press
the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the
liftgate, and then press it again to close.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open
position.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
NOTE:
is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
manual operation.
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
meets sufficient resistance.
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
below ⫺22°F (⫺30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
rear liftgate close button or overhead console close
liftgate switches.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
detection of an obstruction.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
WARNING!
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
(Continued)
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenger
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint)
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat — if equipped
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Please pay close attention to the information in this
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
possible.
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
wheel
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
• Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
(LATCH).
energy during an impact event
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
collision.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
WARNING!
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger You should read the instructions provided with your
Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
tion.
shoulder belts properly.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt- Front Airbags room to inflate.
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the
side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an
accident the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in an accident much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to
keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
Latch Plate
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Latch Plate to Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a
bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an
accident.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in an accident. The belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow it to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Removing Slack from Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
shoulder belt.
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
anchor point.
that fits you best.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
button, verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by
pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it
is locked into position.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
accident.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward the occupant’s chest.
position without pushing the release button. To verify the
WARNING!
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
position.
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in accidents.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
First Row
Second Row
Third Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
N/A
Center
N/A
ALR
N/A
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
Passenger
ALR
ALR
N/A
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupants mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an
accident. These devices may improve the performance of
the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How the Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
worn snugly and positioned properly.
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Repassenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a
deployed airbag must be replaced immediately.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
CAUTION!
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an
accident.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active a comfortable position.
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seatbelts. This feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seatbelts are
fastened. BeltAlert威 triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle
speed over 5 mph (8 km/h). The reminder sequence lasts
for 96 seconds or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt ReAHR In Reset Position
minder Light remains illuminated until front belts are
NOTE:
fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the to fasten their seatbelts. If a front seatbelt is unbuckled
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h),
BeltAlert威 will chime as a single notification and illumi• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
nate the Seat Belt Reminder Light, then will proceed to
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
the 96 second reminder sequence.
dealer.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt
Reminder Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
4. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single
dealer or by following these steps:
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first completed the programming.
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
ON/RUN or START position. Chrysler Group LLC does
on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while renot recommend deactivating BeltAlert威.
buckling the seat belt.
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
position except ON/RUN or START, buckle the driver’s
seatbelt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with
belt alert) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Seatbelt Lock Out
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that
long enough. When it is not required, remove the exwill not allow you to extract the center webbing unless
tender and store it.
the rear seat upper latch is engaged.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is an accident.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
Advanced Front Airbag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbags
2 — Knee Bolster
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Airbags (SAB) to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are located in the
outboard side of the front seats.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether NOTE:
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The • Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Airbags.
• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
airbags, are located above the side windows and their
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag System Components
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag
and Seat Track Position Sensors
system components:
• Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Front Passenger
• Airbag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Airbag
• Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. This low output
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) used for more severe collisions.
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the airbag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags may provide
enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag Label
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the airbag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each airbag
deploys independently, that is a left side impact deploys
the left airbag only and a right-side impact deploys only
the right airbag.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC airbags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down(SABIC) Label Location
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC airbags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners, SAB
and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both
front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy
the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags and SABIC
airbags during impacts that require side airbag occupant
protection.
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC airbags, SAB airbags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as
required, depending on the severity and type of impact.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occu- Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addipants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
Airbags.
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not exAlong with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved collisions.
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
of collision.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all accidents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating airbag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics
also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
airbag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel
and the right side of the instrument panel. When the
ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front
Airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front
Airbags. Different airbag inflation rates are possible,
based on the collision type and severity. The steering
wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the
instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the
airbags inflate to their full size. The airbags fully inflate in
about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time
it takes to blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the
airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag (SAB)
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
Inflator Units
(SABIC) Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are de- During collisions where the impact is confined to a
signed to activate only in certain side collisions.
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on the severity and
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of
SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about oneinflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
in about 10 milliseconds. The side airbag moves at a very
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
high speed and with such a high force, that it could injure
where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates. This
when it is inflated.
especially applies to children.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
until the ignition key is turned off.
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners, SAB and/or
removed.
SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In front and side impacts, front and side impact sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
can aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response
The Advanced Front Airbags are designed to deflate
to certain impact events.
immediately after deployment.
Enhanced Accident Response System
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the communication network remains intact, and the
the airbag system.
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- or all of the following may occur:
ing functions:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra• Cut off fuel to the engine.
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium airbags will not be in place to protect you.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
WARNING!
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your airbag
system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
airbag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with airbag system electrical components. While the
airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any
of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately.
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
were buckled/fastened;
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipaccelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
vehicle or the EDR.
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
United States, and all Canadian provinces, require that
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perlaw, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
sonal data (e.g. name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce- Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckment, could combine the EDR data with the type of led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
crash investigation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
There are different sizes and types of restraints for Infants And Child Restraints
children from newborn size to the child almost large
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
child.
carriers and convertible child seats.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who weigh more than
20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types
of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System.)
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• The second row seating positions are equipped with
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR). To install child
restraint seats pull the belt from the retractor until
there is enough allowance to pass it through the child
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then,
pull the shoulder belt until it is fully extended from the
retractor. Allow the belt to return into the retractor,
pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. For additional
information refer to ⬙Automatic Locking Retractors
Mode⬙ earlier in the Occupant Restraints Section of the
owners’ manual.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg), and who are
older than one year, can ride forward-facing in the
• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are older
WARNING!
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
Seat Anchorage System.)
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
slouching can move the belt out of position.
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltthe back.
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
lap/shoulder belt.
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
structure.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages, have been
available for some time. For some older child restraints,
many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether
strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage
of all the available attachments provided with your child
restraint in any vehicle.
The rear outboard seating positions have lower
anchorages capable of accommodating LATCHcompatible child seats having flexible, webbingmounted lower attachments and child seats
with fixed lower attachments. The rear seat lower anchors
can be readily identified by the symbol located on the
seatback directly above the anchorages and are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces. The vehicle’s seat belt must be used for the center
position. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, never install LATCH-compatible child seats such
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
that two seats share a common lower anchorage.
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played
with, and never leave your child unattended in the
vehicle.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints
in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCHcompatible, you can only install the child restraints using
the vehicle’s seat belts. For typical installation instructions, refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint System”.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
Latch Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
In addition, there are top tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear
seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat
back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
2
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
WARNING!
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel
To Access Top Tether Strap
Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load
floor. Improper usage of the tether can lead to a
failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
First, loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach
the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material.
Then, locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat
where you are placing the child restraint and attach the
tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the
tether strap to provide the most direct path between the
anchor and the child restraint. There are three top tether
anchorages located on the back of the seat, behind the
gap panel. They are not visible until you fold the gap
panel down. Do not use the cargo tie down hooks
located on the floor behind the seat. Finally, tighten all
three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belts
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR),
which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around
the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a
locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate,
pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will
keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull
it tight if necessary.
For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR), pull the belt from the retractor until there is
enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint
and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the
belt until it is fully extended from the retractor. Allow the
belt to return into the retractor, pulling on the excess
webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint. Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position. To access the center seat arm rest
tether first lower the arm rest. The tether is located
behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat
backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat
backing, then raise the armrest and attach the tether hook
to the strap located on the front of the arm rest.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose the top
tether strap anchorages.
2
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
For center seating position route the tether strap over the
seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether
anchor located on the back of the seat. For the outboard
seating positions, route the tether under the head rests,
and attach the hook to the top tether anchor located on
the back of the seat. To access the top tether strap
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel
To Access Top Tether Strap
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
Top Tether Strap Mounting
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load
floor. Improper usage of the tether can lead to a
failure of an infant or child restraint. The child
could be badly injured or killed.
Top Tether Strap Attachment
For the center seating position route the tether strap over
the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the top
tether anchorage located on the back of the seat behind
the gap panel. For the outboard seating positions, route
the tether strap under the headrests and attach the hook
to the top tether anchorage located on the back of the seat
behind the gap panel. Please note the top tether anchorages are not visible until you fold the gap panel down.
Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the
floor behind the seats.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
an accident. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the SAFETY TIPS
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Transporting Passengers
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriNEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
mental and should be avoided.
AREA.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
WARNING!
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
cause serious injury or death.
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve- • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interbelts.
preted as an indication of difficulty.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
Seat Belts
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
inoperable.
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
Airbag Warning Light
ways.
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . 112
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 109
䡵 Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped . . . . . . . 112
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 121
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 131 䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 147
▫ Reclining Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . 147
▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 149
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID
Headlights Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Ambient Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Windshield Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 159
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 160
䡵 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 䡵 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
. . . . . . 162
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . 176
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . 178
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . 180
䡵 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . 184
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . 170
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . 170
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped . . 190
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 195
▫ Parksense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Parksense威 Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Parksense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Enabling And Disabling Parksense威 . . . . . . . 200
▫ Service The Parksense威 Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off —
Without Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . 206
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Sunglass Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Cleaning The Parksense威 System . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 212
▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 201
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
䡵 Parkview威 Rear Back Up Camera —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Reprogramming A Single
HomeLink威 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off —
With Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . 205
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Venting Sunroof – Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Closing Sunroof – Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Opening Power Shade – Express . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Closing Power Shade – Express . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Sunroof And Power Shade Movement –
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
䡵 Command View Sunroof With Power Shade —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Opening Sunroof – Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Pinch Protect Override Cancellation . . . . . . . 220
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Retractable Cargo Area
Cover — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 239
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position. The mirror
head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various
drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The mirror is twisted on the
windshield button counterclockwise and requires no
tools for mounting.
3
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and
normal.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped
The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Outside Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarautomatically.
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.
Rear Detection Zones
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will NOTE:
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors • The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
detection zones.
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
when the vehicle is in PARK.
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends apbeyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
contamination so that the BSM system can function located in the outside mirrors.
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Warning Light Location
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
The BSM system can also be configured to sound an Entering From The Side
audible (chime) alert and reduces the radio volume to Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
notify the driver of objects that have entered the detec- side of the vehicle.
tion zones. Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further
information.
3
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
3
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio volume (if on) will also be
reduced.
Blind Spot Alert
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio volume is reduced.
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
the appropriate visual alert only.
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
the radio volume is reduced.
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is reWhen operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime, the
quested, the radio volume is also reduced. Turn/
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always
side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn
requests the chime.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Commands can be initiated by pressing the VR
located on the radio or steering wheel
button
controls (if equipped).
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle Manual located on the DVD for further details.
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
SEATS
used.
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
vehicle.
Uconnect™ Phone is a hands-free system that allows you
to use voice commands to dial a phone number stored in
WARNING!
your mobile phone. Press the Uconnect™ Phone button
on the radio or steering wheel controls (if equipped) • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
and follow the instructions to pair the mobile phone.
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
or killed.
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
(Continued)
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when you have reached the desired position.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
backward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when you have reached the desired
position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seatbelt.
(Continued)
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Passenger’s Power Seat
Some models are equipped with a six-way power passenger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when you have reached the desired position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seatbelt.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
WARNING! (Continued)
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
(Continued) are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar sup- Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
port. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with manual front driver
raise and lower the position of the support.
or passenger seats. The seats can be adjusted forward or
rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor.
Power Lumbar Switch
Adjustment Bar
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seatbelt.
Recline Lever
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel (below the climate controls).
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that
allow the rear passengers to operate the seats indepenPress the switch once to select HIGH-level dently. The heated seat switches for each heater are
heating. Press the switch a second time to select located on the rear of the center console.
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
maximum of 55 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
Rear Heated Seat Switches
turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
heating. Press the switch a second time to select small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartLOW-level heating. Press the switch a third ment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
in higher ambient temperatures.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
There are two ventilated seat switches that allow the
within two to five minutes.
driver and passenger to operate the seats independently.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
The ventilated seat switches are located on the switch
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
bank in the center stack of the instrument panel, just
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
below the climate controls.
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
maximum of 55 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ventilated seat switches are used
to control the speed of the fans located
in the seat. Press the switch once to
choose HIGH, press it a second time to
choose LOW. Pressing the switch a
third time will turn the ventilated seat
OFF. When HIGH speed is selected
both lights on the switch will be illuminated. When LOW
speed is selected one light will be illuminated.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System —
If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
3
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Push Button
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust(Continued) able. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard headrests
are not removable.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Head Restraint
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.
3
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
fold down easily.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Rear Seat Release
NOTE:
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left
outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right
outboard seat belt buckled.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
Rear Seat Folded
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Rear Seat Release
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the
driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat,
driver’s outside mirror, adjustable steering wheel position (if equipped), and the radio station preset settings.
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also
be programmed to recall the same positions when the
UNLOCK button is pressed.
Driver Memory Buttons
Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One
or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory
position. The memory system can accommodate up to
four RKE transmitters, each one linked to either of the
two memory positions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).
NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered 6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings remove the key.
for that button and store a new one.
7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the
1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to driver’s door.
the ON position.
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
to complete the memory recall before continuing to
transmitters.
Step 3.
10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sideview
the ON position.
mirror to the desired positions.
4. Adjust the power steering column tilt and telescoping
position (if equipped) to the desired positions.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
11. Select ⬙Remote Linked to Memory⬙ in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter ⬙Yes⬙. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 2.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.
2. Press and release MEMORY button number 1. The
system will recall any memory settings stored in position
1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall
before continuing to Step 3.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory MEMORY buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S,
position, using the other numbered memory button, or to 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
driver’s mirror and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
one second will occur before another recall can be
Memory Position Recall
selected.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and
remove the key.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
on the driver’s door.
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
vehicle.
button 1 on the driver’s door.
There are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
available:
button on the RKE transmitter.
• The seat cushion will move rearward approximately
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is
memory position, repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE
greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the
transmitter.
rear seat stop when the key is removed from the
ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
• The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position
is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the
rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition
switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
driving position when the key is placed into the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward To open the hood, two latches must be released.
the ACC/ON position.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically dis- panel and in front of the driver’s door.
abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in
(23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there
is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
Exit/Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry/Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Hood Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left
and lift the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
3
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Latch Location
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
LIGHTS
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
Headlight Switch
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
light and instrument panel lights are also
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headturned
on.
To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
light switch controls the operation of the headlights,
switch
back
to the O (Off) position.
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, also has this customer-programmable feature. When
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
lenses.
the wiper system is on. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, further information.
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is System” and it is activated, the headlights will automatialso on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers And Washers” in this
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
section for further information.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
CAUTION!
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the To Activate
daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams. Refer to “Elecdim to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Lights” in
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customerthis section for further information.
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your InstruSmartBeam™ — If Equipped
ment Panel” for further information.
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
lighting at night by automating high beam control
position.
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe- 3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
NOTE: If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
replaced, the SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to
To Deactivate
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
dealer.
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
reactivate the system.
Only
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll box,
etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause the Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
system to function improperly.
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be
used for normal nighttime driving.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To
turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
The
fog
lights
will
operate only when the parking lights
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
are
on
or
when
the
vehicle headlights are on low beam.
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating headlights are required during the day.
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to the its farthest upward position, or if equipped, when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the
interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the
way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior
lights to go out. This is also known as the “Party” mode
because it allows the doors to stay open for extended
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
Dimmer Control
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on ON.
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
Front Map/Reading Lights
the driver’s door is opened.
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overBattery Saver
head console.
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way
up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed.
Ambient Light
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility of the floor center console and PRNDL area.
3
Ambient Light
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
steering column.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Multifunction Lever
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the
lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding the Features
of Your Vehicle”.
3
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
3
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the cycles, then turn off.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
Mist Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windautomatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
shield.
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
• Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
• A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
to activate this feature.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
Sensing feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandtive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 can be used if the driver The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
OFF position when not using the system.
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
3
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door
trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or
may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel and seat can be programmed to
come on during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting
System — If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the steering wheel heater to
overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic To Set A Desired Speed
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
vehicle set speed.
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
To Activate
operate at the selected speed.
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
To Deactivate
turned off when not in use.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
WARNING!
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. speed memory.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
To Resume Speed
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
moderate hills is normal.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
Control.
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
IF EQUIPPED
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
the vehicle ahead.
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
− Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
− Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight
distance conditions.
− Does not predict the lane curvature or the movement of preceding vehicles and will not compensate
for such changes.
− Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
− Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehicle’s
braking capability, and will not bring the vehicle to a
complete stop.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations
(i.e., in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”
in this section.
NOTE: The system will not react to preceding vehicles.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Control.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
DISTANCE SETTING
RES +
SET CANCEL
ON/OFF
MODE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When pushing the RES + button without a previously
set speed in memory.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
ACC Set
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
• The system will not be controlling the distance be- To Cancel
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle The system will disable ACC without erasing the
speed will only be determined by the position of the memory if:
accelerator pedal.
• You softly tap the brake pedal.
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• If the transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
Driver Override
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off, • You turn OFF the ignition.
ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume Speed
Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
last set speed.
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of
20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• You push the ON/OFF button.
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. This
could cause a collision and/or serious injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
To Vary The Speed Setting
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pressing and holding the RES + button. If the button is
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is
released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC
display.
Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
NOTE:
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
• The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pressing and holding the SET - button. If the button is
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to dehill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
crease in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downEVIC display.
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
Distance Setting 2
Distance Setting 3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
Distance Setting 1
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
To change the distance setting, press the Distance button • The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
(24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages
setting adjusts between long, medium, and short.
itself.
• The distance setting is changed.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
Brake Alert
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
from the vehicle ahead.
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Press the MENU button (located on the steering wheel) repeatedly until one of the following displays in the EVIC:
The set speed will continue to display in place of the
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
while ACC is set.
Menu
Button
3
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
− When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
− When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
ACC SET
− When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
Example Only
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC Display Warnings And Maintenance
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
• Set Speed Change
The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
• Distance Setting Change
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
• System Cancel
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
• Driver Override
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the
• System Off
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.
• ACC Proximity Warning
The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message
• ACC Unavailable Warning
can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
The EVIC will return to the last display selected reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Clean Radar Sensor Warning
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise • If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your
Control is still available. For additional information refer
authorized dealer for service.
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, Removing ACC Sensor For Off-Roading
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
NOTE: When off-roading, it may be advisable to reDoing so could cause an ACC system failure or
move the ACC sensor. The sensor is located behind the
malfunction.
front lower grille in the center of the vehicle. After
When the condition that deactivated the system is no removing the lower fascia, you may remove the lower
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive sensor and bracket assembly.
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
To remove the sensor follow these instructions:
simply reactivating it.
1. Unplug the connector by depressing the two tabs on
NOTE:
the connector and pulling it out. Do not pull by the
• If the “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
wiring or use any tools to remove the connector.
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other 2. Remove the wiring christmas tree attachment from the
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your back of the bracket.
authorized dealer.
3. Remove the two M6 fasteners that connect the bracket
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after- to the bumper.
market grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
NOTE: Do not change the adjustment fasteners or pull To reinstall the sensor and bracket assembly reverse the
the sensor off of the bracket. Doing so may misalign the process above. The fastener torque required to assembly
sensor.
the bracket back to the beam is 6.6 ft lbs (9 Nm).
Store the sensor and bracket assembly in a safe location. ACC Unavailable Warning
The wiring and connector must be stowed properly after If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
the sensor and bracket assembly is removed.
temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
A connector plug is stowed on top of the bumper beam.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
Insert the wiring connector into the connector plug.
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
NOTE: When the sensor is removed, Adaptive Cruise occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
Control, Normal Cruise Control, and Forward Collision cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Warning will not be available. The cluster will display the
warning “ACC/FCW Unavailable - Service Radar Sensor.”
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service ACC Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
ACC/FCW Unavailable Warning
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Adding A Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACC
performance does not return to normal after removing
the trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle
may move in and out of the line of travel, which can
cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns And Bends
In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too
late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late
or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be
ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
Lane Changing
ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC will not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There will not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
Classification Specifications:
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
47 C.F.R. Part 15
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
47
C.F.R Part 15.515
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To change modes, press the MODE button when the
system is in either the OFF, READY, or SET position.
“Cruise Ready” will be displayed if the system was in
ACC READY or ACC SET position. “Cruise Off” will be
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position. To NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or
switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, press the changing speed, not the speedometer.
MODE button a second time.
To Vary The Speed Setting
There are two ways to change the set speed:
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-tovehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a
safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
• Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the
desired speed and press the SET - button.
• Tap the RES + or SET - button to increase or decrease
the set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments respectively. Hold the RES + or SET - button for 5 mph
(8 km/h) increments.
To Cancel
The system will disable normal Cruise Control without
erasing the memory if:
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the • You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
• You press the CANCEL button.
speed.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) warns the driver of a
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and
To Resume
prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the
Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from
collision.
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set
speed.
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
To Turn Off
wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end
memory if:
collision is probable a warning message (both audible
• You push the ON/OFF button.
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the
system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of
• You turn off the ignition.
you is no longer probable, the warning message will be
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
deactivated.
If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,
the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or
Normal Cruise Control).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) refer
FCW Message
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
NOTE: The minimum speed for FCW activation is “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in10 mph (16 km/h).
formation. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will be
displayed in the EVIC.
FCW settings can only be changed when the vehicle is in
PARK.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
Example Only
Example Only
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
3
FCW Off Example
Example Only
NOTE: In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed
in the EVIC.
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher
rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the unavailable screens.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
FCW Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
ACC/FCW Unavailable Warning
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense威 System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense姞 Sensors
The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense姞 Warning Display
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Prochanged to the ON/RUN position.
grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customerposition, the system will remain active until the vehicle
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Inspeed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
strument Panel” for further information.
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense威 Warning Display is located in the Instru- ParkSense姞 Display
ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the will turn ON indicating the system status.
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Park Assist ON
Rear Park Assist Display
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
3
Park Assist OFF
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Display Message
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Park Assist ON
Arcs
None
Radio Mute
No
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
Warning Object
Warning Object
Detected
Detected
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense威 will MUTE the radio, if on, when
the system is sounding an audio tone.
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
Warning Object
Detected
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes
Warning Object
Detected
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense姞
ParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled with a switch
located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or
through the Customer-Programmable Features section of
the EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or
Sound and Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the ParkSense威 switch is pressed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK
ASSIST OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
The ParkSense威 switch LED will be ON when ParkSense威 is disabled or defective. The ParkSense威 switch
LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.
The ParkSense威 system uses four sensors located in the
rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in
(200 cm) away from the rear bumper fascia. The warning
display located above in the Instrument Cluster’s EVIC
provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate
the range of the object.
Service The ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System
When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System is malfunctioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
NOTE:
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense威
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 system operatwill not operate.
ing properly.
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and the
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
• When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster
dirt or other obstruction, see your authorized dealer.
will display “PARK ASSIST OFF.” Furthermore, once
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off until you turn
EVIC, see your authorized dealer.
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the instrument
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
cluster will display “PARK ASSIST OFF” message for
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damas long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
age the sensors.
• ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense威
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense威.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
System, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView威 camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威 camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off —
With Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
the “enable rear camera in reverse” soft key and pressing
the “save” soft-key.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off —
Without Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink威), power liftgate and power sunroof
switches may also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Sunglass Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Front Map/Reading Lights
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
Sunglass Bin Door
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink威 channels.
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away • After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the gakeeping the indicator light in view.
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
System.”
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and handheld transmitter buttons.
and observe the indicator light.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
open and close while you train.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
NOTE:
then turns to a constant light, proceed to “Programming
• Some gate operators and garage door openers may A Rolling Code System.”
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
Programming A Rolling Code System
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 1. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.
door.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
2. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling at this time.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
door or gate motor.
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
Using HomeLink姞
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威” Step 3, with the following:
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow these steps:
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
are some of the most common solutions:
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not • Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
release the button.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
Security
to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
the switch forward and release to Express Close.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re- Sunshade Operation
sult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
disabled.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
Pinch Protect Override
open.
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
Wind Buffeting
the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
to move toward the closed position.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
pressed.
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Venting Sunroof — Express
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switches remain active for up approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has
been turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
COMMAND VIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The command view sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
3
Command View Sunroof and Power Shade Switches
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof – Express
Press the sunroof switch rearward for less than one
second and release, and the sunroof glass will automatically slide fully open from any position, then stop. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation,
any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop
the sunroof. If the shade is closed when the sunroof
switch is pressed, the shade will automatically move to
the middle position before the sunroof begins Express
Open operation.
Venting Sunroof – Express
Press the center “Vent” button on the sunroof switch for
less than one second and release, and the sunroof glass
will automatically vent fully open from any position,
then stop. This is called “Express Vent”. During Express
Vent operation, any sunroof switch press or shade switch
press will stop the sunroof. If the shade is closed when
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
the vent switch is pressed, the shade will automatically position then stop. During Express Shade Open operamove to the middle position before the sunroof begins tion, any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will
stop the shade.
Express Vent operation.
Closing Sunroof – Express
Press the sunroof switch forward for less than one second
and release, and the sunroof glass will automatically
close from any position, then stop. This is called “Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any sunroof
switch press or shade switch press will stop the sunroof.
Opening Power Shade – Express
Press the shade switch rearward for less than one second
and release, and the shade will automatically open, then
stop. This is called “Express Shade Open”. If the shade is
forward of the middle position, it will move to the
middle position then stop. If the shade is at or rearward
of the middle position, it will move to the full open
Closing Power Shade – Express
Press the shade switch forward for less than one second
and release, and the shade will automatically close, then
stop. This is called “Express Shade Close”. If the sunroof
is not at the closed position and the shade is rearward of
the middle position, the shade will move to the middle
position then stop. If the sunroof is not at the closed
position and the shade is at the middle position, the
sunroof will automatically move to the fully closed
position before the shade begins Express Shade Close
operation. During Express Shade Close operation, any
sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the
shade.
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof And Power Shade Movement – Manual
If any sunroof or shade switch is pressed and held for
more than one second, the sunroof or shade movement
will continue only as long as the switch is continuously
held. Whenever the switch is released, any sunroof or
shade movement will stop. This allows the sunroof or
shade to be stopped at any desired partially open
position.
Pinch Protect Override
Method 1: If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc)
prevents closing of the sunroof or shade, press the
corresponding switch forward and hold for two seconds
after the reversal motion ends. After two seconds, all
closing motions will be manual and will have Pinch
Protect disabled. This will allow the sunroof or shade to
move towards the closed position.
Method 2: If three consecutive sunroof or shade close
Pinch Protect Feature
attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch
the sunroof or the shade during any close operation. If an
Protect disabled.
obstruction is detected, the sunroof or shade will automatically reverse direction to release the obstruction. If Pinch Protect Override Cancellation
this occurs, remove the obstruction and then press the Once the sunroof or shade reaches the closed position,
sunroof or shade switch forward to complete the desired Pinch Protect will reactivate. In addition, if any other
switch is pressed which moves the sunroof or shade
close motion.
away from the closed position, Pinch Protect will
reactivate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switches can be programmed to
remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after
the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features (System Setup)” under “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
to the battery and powered at all times.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward
on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain
access to this power outlet.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
element must be used.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
3
Center Console Outlet
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area.
Rear Power Outlet
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter
Panel
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
The power inverter switch is located
on the switch bank below the Climate
Controls. To turn on the power outlet,
press the switch once. Press the switch
a second time to turn the power outlet
off.
NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pressed,
there will be a delay of approximately one second before
the inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the
inverter is producing AC power.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the fold-down center armrest.
located in the center console.
Rear Cupholders
Front Cupholder Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the
latch and lower the glove box door.
3
Opened Glove Compartment
Glove Compartment
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
Center Console
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy The center console contains both an upper and a lower
access.
storage area.
Door Panel Storage
Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the lid.
3
Lower Storage Compartment
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Storage Compartment Latches
Rechargeable Flashlight
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
lower storage compartment.
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
that recharge when snapped back into place.
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
Three-Press Switch
Press And Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Cargo Storage Bins
There are four removable storage bins located in the rear
cargo area. There are two storage bins located on either
side of the cargo area.
Two additional storage bins are located under the load
floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor
and attach the tether hook (attached to the bottom of the
load floor) to the liftgate opening.
3
Rear Storage Bins
Tether Strap
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
Lower Storage Bins
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Cover
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
WARNING! (Continued)
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
located on the control lever. The control lever is located
on the left side of the steering column.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
first detent for intermittent operation and to the OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more will
activate the washer pump which will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held. Upon release
of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear
wiper operation. When this rotary control is in the OFF
position, rotating it downward will activate the rear
washer pump which will continue to operate as long as
the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle two
times before returning to the parked position.
If the liftgate flipper glass is open, the rear window
wiper/washer functionality is interrupted and the wiper
stops at that “park” position. When the liftgate flipper
glass is closed, the rear wiper will resume wiper/washer
functionality after five seconds.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the defroster automatically turns off after approximately
switch is released the pump will resume normal opera- 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
tion.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
CAUTION!
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
the heating elements:
dealer can order and install MOPAR威 crossbars built
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on specifically for this roof rack system.
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
after soaking with warm water.
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra- exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight
turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the
• If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed
MOPAR威 crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the
experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For
rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position,
improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the
retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into
rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna.
position.
• The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if
NOTE:
equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.
• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
in use, place the front and rear crossbars approximately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do
not carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or some other protection
between the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 272
䡵 Instrument Cluster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 258
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Vehicle Info
(Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ Tire Psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go Display —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 296
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 297
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 288
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 289
▫ Operation Instructions —
CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . 291
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 307
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 307
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 312
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 313
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 319
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Sirius Backseat TV™) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 320
䡵 Video Entertainment System™
(Sales Code XRV) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
. . . . . . . 323
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Dual-Zone Manual Heating And Air
Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Storage Bin
9 — ESC Button
10 — Ignition Switch
11 — Hood Release
12 — Fuel Door Release
13 — Headlight Switch
14 – Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
(RPM x 1000).
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
2. Airbag Warning Light
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
not require towing.
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, then have the system inspected at an
CAUTION!
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
Vehicle” for further information.
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
required.
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
ON/RUN.
4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
system will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when the ignition switch is turned to the
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Inthat caused the ESC activation.
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. Hill Descent Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
5. TOW/HAUL Indicator Light — If Equipped
The symbol indicates the status of the Hill
This light will illuminate when the TOW/
Decent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will
HAUL button has been selected. The TOW/
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
HAUL button is located in the center of the
be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
instrument panel (below the climate controls).
Low” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph
6. Turn Signal Indicator
(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attemptThe arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals
ing to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator lamp will
when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone will
flash on/off.
chime, and an EVIC message will appear if the turn
10. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
signals are left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Display/Odometer Display
7. High Beam Indicator
The odometer display shows the total distance the veIndicates that headlights are on high beam.
hicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
8. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
lights are on.
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center”.
11. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
4
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
14. Brake Warning Light
12. Position Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light monitors various brake functions,
This indicator will illuminate when the park
including brake fluid level and parking brake
lights or headlights are turned on.
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
13. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
sary.
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is 16. 4 LOW
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
15. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked toThis light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
gether forcing the front and rear wheels to
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
wheels.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
For further information on four-wheel drive operation
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
17. Speedometer
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
Indicates vehicle speed.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Red
18. Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the Telltale Area
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable red tellvehicle where the fuel door is located.
tales. For further information refer to “Electronic vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)”.
19. Fuel Gauge
23. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
Light — If Equipped
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
20. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) White
Telltale Area
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable white
telltales. For further information refer to “Electronic 24. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
21. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
Amber Telltale Area
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable amber
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
caution telltales. For further information refer to “Elecignition is first turned on.
tronic vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
25. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately, and call an authorized dealership for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The EVIC consists of the following:
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
• System Status
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
instrument cluster.
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP button to scroll upwheel:
ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units,
System Setup) and sub menus.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and sub
menus.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus, sub menus or to select a
personal setting in the setup menu. Press and
hold the SELECT button for two seconds to
reset features.
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BACK Button
• Right front turn signal lamp out
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
• Left rear turn signal lamp out
previous menu or sub menu.
• Right rear turn signal lamp out
• Check Tire Pressure
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• ESC System Off
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
• Service blind spot system
the following messages:
• Blind spot detection unavailable
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Blind spot system off
• Service Park Assist System
• Blind spot system unavailable sensor blocked
• Park Assist System Blinded
• Normal Cruise Ready — When Adaptive Cruise Con• Park Assist Disabled
trol (ACC) system is turned off and Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode is available. Refer to
• Keyfob Battery Low
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
• Liftglass Open
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Left front turn signal lamp out
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
• Adaptive Cruise Off — When the Adaptive Cruise • Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after
Control (ACC) system is turned off. Refer to “Adapsetting the desired speed in the ACC system. Refer to
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• ACC Ready — When the ACC system is activated. • Distance Set — After changing the desired following
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Underdistance in the ACC system, this message will display
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
momentarily. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
• ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the ACC
Vehicle” (if equipped).
system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if • Brake — If the ACC system predicts that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set
equipped).
distance, this message will flash and a chime will
• ACC Cancelled — To disable the ACC system. Refer to
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immeThe Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
diately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe
• Sensed Vehicle Indicator — The system detects a
distance from the vehicle ahead. Refer to “Adaptive
slower moving vehicle in the same lane. Refer to
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
tures Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Clean Radar Sensor in the Front of Vehicle — If the • Oil change due
ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting
• Key in ignition
conditions. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if • Lights on
equipped).
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error — If the
• Ignition or Accessory On
ACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction
that limits functionality. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise • Ignition or Accessory On. Lights On
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
• Turn signal on
Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Park assist on
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor — If the
ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault • Warning object detected
that requires service from an authorized dealer. Refer
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understand• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Coolant low
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Service air suspension system
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
• Remote start disabled — System fault
• Function currently unavailable — Power Liftgate
• Remote start disabled — Turn key
• Unlock to operate — Power Liftgate
• Remote start active — Key to Run
• Put in Park to operate — Power Liftgate
• Memory 1 profile set
• Automatic high beams on
• Memory 2 profile set
• Automatic high beams off
• Memory system unavailable — Not in Park
• Service Four Wheel Drive System
• Memory system unavailable — Seatbelt buckled
• Four Wheel Drive System in neutral
• Memory 1 profile recall
• ECO — Fuel Saver Indicator
• Memory 2 profile recall
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — AUTOMATIC
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — ROCK
• Wrong Key
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — SAND/MUD
• Damaged Key
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — SNOW
• Key not programmed
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — SPORT
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Sport Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required
• Rock Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required
• Off Road Ride Height Level 1 — This message is
displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has
achieved the Off Road Height Level 1.
• To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
• Off Road Ride Height Level 2 — This message is
Owners Manual
displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has
• For 4x4 Low Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans in
achieved the Off Road Height Level 2.
N Press 4 Low
• Vehicle Lowered To Entry/Exit (Park) Height — This
• For 4x4 High Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans
message is displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle
in N Press 4 Low
has achieved the Park Height.
• Terrain System Settings Not Available
• Entry/Exit (Park) Height in Progress — This message
is displayed (for 5 seconds) when the request is made
• Raising Vehicle Ride Height (with icon)
to go into Entry/Exit Height while the vehicle speed is
• Lowering Vehicle Ride Height (with icon)
between 15 and 25 mph. This shows that the request
has been recognized and will lower to Entry/Exit
• Normal Vehicle Ride Height — This message is disheight when vehicle is below 15 mph.
played (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has achieved
the Normal Vehicle Ride Height.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
• Service Air Suspension System — This is displayed • Air Suspension System Cooling Down – Please Wait —
when a fault has occurred in the system. The system
This message is displayed if the compressor temperawill have limited operation at that point.
ture level is too high. Level control is suspended until
the compressor has cooled down.
• Immediate Air Suspension Service/Repair Required
— This is displayed when a fault has occurred in the • Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered – Door Open — This
message is displayed if a door or the liftgate is ajar and
system which results in a complete system shutdown.
level control is suspended.
The system will be non operational at that point.
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height — • Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And
This message is displayed in advance warning to the
Tire Change
driver that the vehicle will be moved to the next lower
• Aerodynamic Ride Height — This is displayed (for
preset position unless the speed is reduced.
5 seconds) when the vehicle has achieved the Aerody• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted — The vehicle
namic Height.
speed is too high to enter one of the preset levels
(Entry/Exit Level/Off Road Ride Height Level 1/Off
Road Ride Height Level 2).
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC White Telltale Lights
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tellThis light will turn on when the electronic
tales. These telltales include:
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under• Shift Lever Status
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed
indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
This light will turn on when the ACC is ON.
indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
been engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
further information on ERS, refer to “Starting And OperFeatures Of Your Vehicle”.
ating”
• Electronic Speed Control ON
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
This light will turn on when the ACC is SET.
speed control is ON. For further information,
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “UnderCruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
• Power Steering System Over Temperature —
If Equipped
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
TEMP” message and a icon are displayed on
the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
over and let vehicle idle. After five minutes, the system
will cool and return to normal operation. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
This light warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and
prompts the driver to take action in order to
avoid the collision. For further information,
refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Air Suspension Up
The air suspension up telltale will illuminate
when the air suspension is in use. For further
information, refer to “Starting And Operating”.
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn
off the message. If the problem continues, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
• Air Suspension Down
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
The air suspension down telltale will illuminate when the air suspension is in use. For • Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the windfurther information, refer to “Starting And Opshield washer fluid is low.
erating”.
• Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
• SERV 4WD
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift
fuel is added.
4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light stays on or
• Loose Gascap Indicator
comes on during driving, it means that the
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
4WD system is not functioning properly and
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly that service is required.
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
telltales include:
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
• Door Ajar
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
more door may be ajar.
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
• Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
may be ajar.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
• Liftgate Flipper Glass Ajar
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
flipper glass may be ajar.
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho- vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
rized dealer.
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
required and you may experience reduced performance,
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
may require towing.
This light informs you of a problem with the
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
This light warns of an overheated engine condilight will come on when the ignition is first
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apturned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is to cool.
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
light goes off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
the SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy functime you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
tions displays in the EVIC:
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica- • Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
refer to the following procedure.
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
Trip Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode —
If Equipped
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
4
Fuel Saver Mode — On
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
will appear whenever MDS (if equipped) allows the
engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are driving Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
in a fuel efficient manner.
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT between mph or km/h
button.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of EVIC.
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
Trip Info
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change Info” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN butuntil the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant tons until one of the following Trip functions displays in
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW the EVIC:
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
• Trip A
Vehicle Speed
• Trip B
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the • Elapsed Time
SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
Trip Computer functions.
displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informaclear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
tion:
resettable functions, press and hold the SELECT button
Trip A
for two seconds. Current display will reset along with
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last other functions
reset.
Units
Trip B
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
reset.
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
Elapsed Time
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
or START position.
selected.
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
available information displays, then press SELECT to
display anyone of the following choices.
• Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Trans Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
• Engine Hours
Displays the hours of engine operation.
Tire PSI
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
PSI” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the following System Status messages
displays in the EVIC:
• System OK
• System Warnings Displayed (will display all currently
active System Warnings)
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pressure of all four road tires). For additional information,
refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor System” in “Starting
And Operating”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
• Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
kPa, or BAR.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-N-Go
icon momentarily appears in the lower right corner of the
EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting And Operating” for more information.
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
superseded by another display of higher priority. But
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display
NOTE:
• Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat always re-appears.
will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi Compass / Temperature Display
(14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
to “Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pressures” facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
in “Starting And Operating” for additional informa- readings and the outside temperature.
tion.
Tire Pressure Display
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may 2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or then press the SELECT button.
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
displayed in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
4
Compass Variance Map
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
then press the SELECT button.
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT
button. The last variance zone number displays in the
EVIC.
Select Language
When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français),
Italian (Italiano), German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Neder5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit.
lands). Then, as you continue, the information will disCustomer-Programmable Features (System Setup)
play in the selected language.
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is Nav–Turn By Turn
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning When this feature is selected, the navigation system
message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE, is followed in three utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destinaseconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
displays in the EVIC.
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the check-mark is removed, showing the system has been
deactivated.
following choices.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Auto Lock Doors
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Remote Unlock Sequence
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
Auto Unlock Doors
scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highWhen this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
lighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
setting has been selected.
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enterfeature showing the system has been activated, or the N-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to
check-mark is removed showing the system has been Unlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
deactivated.
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is
programmed touching the handle more than once will
only result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door
first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the
interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock
all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
removed, showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.
In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when the remote start is activated.
These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed,
showing the system has been deactivated.
RKE Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected, you can use your RKE
transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed memory
profiles. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals
(if equipped), power tilt and telescopic steering column
(if equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets.
When OFF is selected, only the MEMORY switch on the
driver’s door trim panel will recall memory profiles. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
Horn with Remote Lock
button a check-mark appears next to the feature showing
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
the system has been activated or the check-mark is
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
This feature may be selected with or without the “Flash
Lamps with Lock” feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed, showing the
system has been deactivated.
Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed, showing the system has been
deactivated.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed, showing the system has been deactivated.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then press and release the SELECT button until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has
been selected.
Headlamps with Wipers
(Available with Automatic Headlamps Only)
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed,
showing the system has been deactivated.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
(Available with Memory Seat Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed, showing the system has been
deactivated.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirror in Reverse
When this feature is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed, showing the system has been
deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected.
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display, this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry)
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
Illuminated Approach
or the check-mark is removed, showing the system has
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your
Auto High Beams
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
(Available with SmartBeam™ Only)
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
that setting has been selected.
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed, showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Wiper Mode — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed, showing the system has
been deactivated. When this feature is deactivated, the
system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper
operation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
When this feature is selected, the HSA system is active.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting
And Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed, showing the system has been
deactivated.
Blind Spot Alert
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot
Alert. By pressing and releasing the SELECT button once,
the Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind
Spot: Lights Only” mode. When this mode is selected the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will
only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. By
pressing and releasing the SELECT button a second time
“Blind Spot: Lights/CHM” mode is activated. In this
mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you
when you are much closer. This allows for a more
dynamic driving experience. To change FCW status press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
activated or the check-mark is removed, showing the
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
system has been deactivated.
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Conalignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
in the BSM not operating to specification.
alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Blind Spot: Off” is
selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
Forward Collision Warning
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can
be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status
of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will
warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you when you are farther away. This gives you the
most reaction time. To change the setting for more
dynamic driving select the Near setting. This warns you
Display Units of Measure In:
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps (if equipped)
can be changed between English and Metric units of
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) —
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Media Center 130 (RES)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
position to operate the radio.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the another selection. Holding either button will bypass
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second stations without stopping, until you release it.
time to turn off the radio.
TIME Button
Electronic Volume Control
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 and radio frequency.
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
Clock Setting Procedure
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
volume, and to the left decreases it.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
set at the same volume level as last played.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
knob to save time change.
mid-range tones.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
RW/FF
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
AM or FM frequencies.
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by MP3 Audio Play
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press NOTE:
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
position to operate the radio.
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
button works in a similar manner.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
AM/FM Button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SEEK Button
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
change of pace.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Press this button to change the display from a large CD Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
to load than non-multisession discs
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
increase with more files and folders
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right ACC position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —
screen.
If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature TIME Button
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further and radio frequency.
details.
Clock Setting Procedure
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
will begin to blink.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
knob to save time change.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. AM or FM frequencies.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TUNE Control
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
procedure, starting at Step 2.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be sePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Music Type information.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
treble tones.
format types:
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
Program Type
16-Digit Character Display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
No program type or
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
None
undefined
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Classical
Classicl
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
College
College
the front and rear speakers.
Country
Country
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Foreign Language
Language
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Program Type
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
16-Digit Character Display
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Program Type
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character Display
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
NOTE:
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
position to operate the radio.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
RW/FF
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
AM/FM Button
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file norPress the right SEEK button to move to the next ranmally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefollowing table are supported. In addition, variable bit
character extension)
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
character extension)
VBR bit rates.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
Supported MP3 File Formats
Layer 3
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
supported by the radios.
not play the file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
supported.
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
Playback of MP3 Files
before writing to the disc.
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
time to start playing the MP3 files.
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
by the following:
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
CD-R media
playable files).
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer The folder list will time out after five seconds.
to load than non-multisession discs
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
increase with more files and folders
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time⬙ priority mode.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file. TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
ignition is OFF).
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
If Equipped
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcastMP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
vehicle speakers.
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio limited coverage in Alaska.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
Number (ESN/SID)
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
Please have the following information available when
mode.
calling:
Satellite Antenna
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
Number (ESN/SID).
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly (Satellite) Mode
on or above the antenna.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
Reception Quality
ACC position to operate the radio.
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
SEEK Buttons
following reasons:
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
structure or under a physical obstacle.
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
form of short audio mutes.
without stopping until you release it.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
SCAN Button
cause intermittent reception.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before concause signal blockage.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
RW/FF
type.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
direction of the arrows.
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
following items:
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
Sirius subscription.
twice.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Buttons 1 - 6
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
and press and release that button. If a button is not commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butOperating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) —
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
If Equipped
stored into pushbutton memory.
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
iPod威 or external USB device support capability.
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate • Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
feature to control the connected device.
an option with these radios.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console
or glove compartment.
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Connecting The iPod姞 or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console or glove compartment.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio Play Mode
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents. When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
audio device)
USB device and display data:
Controlling The iPod姞 or External USB Device
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
Using Radio Buttons
previous track.
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
playing a track, skips to the next track or press VR
on the radio faceplate or press VR button and say ⬙USB⬙
button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3 control
mode, audio tracks (if available from audio device) start
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
press VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and • Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
holding the FF >> button.
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
Off⬙.
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 deseconds.
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
each track in the current list and then forward to the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
list, or can press VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
Track⬙.
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previ• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
ous and next tracks.
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
device, or press VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the or
external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
external USB device.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
• To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the ⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
Uconnect™ phone system.
3. Say name of the audio device or ask Uconnect™
phone system to list audio devices.
Controlling BTSA using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
Next Track
the radio or press VR button and say “Bluetooth StreamUse the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
ing Audio”.
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
Play Mode
music on your cellular phone.
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
Previous Track
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
device first, then it will get streamed to Uconnect™
previous track music on your cellular phone.
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to Uconnect™
phone system, but just one can be selected and played. Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
Selecting different Audio Device
current song that is playing will display info.
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect™ Multimedia
(SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™) — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting
technology to provide streaming video. The subscription
service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. Uconnect™
studio (SIRIUS Backseat TV™) offers three video channels for family entertainment, directly from its satellites
and broadcasting studios.
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two headsets. Refer to the “Uconnect™ Multimedia” section of
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the
front seats.
NOTE: SIRIUS Backseat TV™ service is not available in
Hawaii or Canada and has limited coverage in Alaska.
Refer to the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the
DVD, RER Navigation, RHB Multimedia or RBZ Multimedia User Manuals for detailed operating instructions.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM™
(SALES CODE XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) consists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
Lowering the Display Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
4
Remote Control Location
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
access the switches.
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch CD Player
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
after the current track begins to play.
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
Radio Operation
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
center button will select the next available CD in the
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
player.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
precautions:
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
too high.
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual-Zone Manual Heating and Air Conditioning
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower
speeds.
Temperature Controls
• Driver Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment for the left front seat
The Dual-Zone Manual Climate Controls allow both
occupant. Rotating the dial left into
driver and front passenger seat occupants to select indithe blue area of the scale indicates
vidual comfort settings. The controls consist of a series of
cooler temperatures while rotating
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
• Passenger Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment for the right front seat
occupant. Rotating the dial left into
the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Push the mode control buttons to choose from several
patterns of air distribution.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a • In Floor, Mix and Defrost modes a small amount of air
will flow through the outboard panel outlets for
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
occupant comfort.
window demist outlets.
Floor
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
Defrost
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
Air is directed through the windshield and side
be used when outside conditions such as
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxismoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are presmum blower and temperature settings for best windent. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
shield and side window defrosting.
control button to illuminate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
NOTE:
Air Conditioning Control
• Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make
Press this button to engage the Air
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
when the Air Conditioning System is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
• The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,
temperatures while rotating right into
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the red area indicates warmer temthe Outside Air position for maximum defogging.
peratures.
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
control is set to panel or panel / floor.
• MAX A/C
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbFor maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
ing the mode control selection.
buttons at the same time.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
• ECONOMY MODE
position or the ignition switch START/STOP button is
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
cycled to OFF, the recirculation feature will be
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
cancelled.
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows
both driver and front passenger seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
• When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode
operation, Auto blower operation is set by using a
push button on the control unit and a comfort temperature setting by using the temperature up and
down buttons.
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel
1. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
comfort level desired by the driver and passenger.
into manual mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
2. Recirculation Control Button
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The
Press and release to change the current setting, the blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
indicator illuminates when ON.
selected.
3. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
This display shows the temperature setting for the left Provides the passenger with independent temperature
front seat occupant.
control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
4. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel, 9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
5. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection. 10. Auto Temperature Control Button
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
6. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
This display shows the temperature setting for the right
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
front seat occupant.
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
7. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the modes.
indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the
lowest blower setting. Performing this function will
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
15. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
16. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
Automatic Operation
OFF
1. Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature
13. Mode Control Button
Control (ATC) Panel.
Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, BiLevel, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front
ATC to switch into manual mode.
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
14. SYNC Button
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
Press and release to control the temperature setting for
automatically maintain that comfort level.
both zones from the driver temperature control.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is Manual Operation
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience This system offers a full complement of manual override
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to features.
function automatically.
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for temperature control will continue to operate automaticold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts cally.
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
There are seven fixed blower speeds.
comfort as quickly as possible.
Use the outer dial control to regulate
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
the amount of air forced through the
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
system in any mode you select. The
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
blower speed increases as you move
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features
the control clockwise and decreases
(SETUP)” in this section of the manual.
Blower Control when you move the control counterclockwise.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by Bi-Level Mode
adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets.
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
Auto mode.
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
Floor Mode
by selecting one of the following positions.
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. demister outlets.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
Mix Mode
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
while keeping the windshield clear.
amount of airflow from these outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
NOTE:
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window • If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected, the
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
blower will automatically default to medium-high unless
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
the blower is controlled manually.
Recirculation Control
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Air Conditioning (A/C)
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set to a cool Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air vehicle.
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
deactivate the A/C system.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Floor/Defrost Mix and
Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
modes are selected.
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
DEFROST mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
Window Fogging
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on
will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air
direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.
Operating Tips
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Summer Operation
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
NOTE: In some cases during high temperature trailer
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
tow operation the Air Conditioning system performance
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions.
may be reduced. This is to help protect the engine from
Vacation Storage
overheating during the high load condition.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condiautomatic recirculation system. When the system senses
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 350
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 350
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 348
䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Quadra-Trac I威 Operating Instructions/
Precautions – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Quadra-Trac II威 Operating Instructions/
Precautions – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 䡵 Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Quadra-Drive威 II System – If Equipped . . . . 362
▫ When To Use 4WD Low Range –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
䡵 Selec-Terrain™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
䡵 Quadra-Lift™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
䡵 Multi-Displacement System (MDS)
(If Equipped) — 5.7L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . . 379
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Ready Alert Braking – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Rain Brake Support – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — Four-Wheel
Drive Models With MP3023 Two-Speed
Transfer Case Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 399
䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 406
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 415
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
䡵 Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 414
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 420
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 426
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
䡵 Flexible Fuel (3.6L Engine Only) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . 431
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 436
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 444
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind
Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I威
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel
Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ Recreational Towing — Quadra–
Trac II威 /Quadra–Drive威 II Four-Wheel
Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in
the ignition switch. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
before shifting into any driving gear.
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
Installing and Removing the ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing the Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
position.
Removing the Button
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the
button loose.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK START/STOP Button
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Normal Starting
Using the ENGINE START/STOP Button
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm 3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
accelerator pedal.
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressbutton is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
PARK position, or it could roll.
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
OFF position.
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions – With Driver’s
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
Foot OFF the Brake Pedal
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or ⫺29°C)
(In PARK or NEUTRAL Position)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
and START. To change the ignition switch positions
without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
follow these steps.
• Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing a Flooded Engine
(Using ENGINE START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine
(Using Fob With Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor The engine block heater cord is located:
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
• 3.6L Engine – coiled and strapped to the engine oil
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
dipstick tube.
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
• 5.7L Engine – bundled and fastened to the injector
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
harness.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. Once
the key fob is removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or
START position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles/kilometers.
Gear Ranges
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold. If
there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position before restarting.
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
restarting the engine if the ignition switch is not turned to
the LOCK position first.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever into the PARK position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
DRIVE
This range should be selected only when the vehicle is at
a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied. The
transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
you to move the shift lever left (-) or right (+) when the
shift lever is in the DRIVE position, allowing you to limit
the highest available gear. For example, if the driver
shifts the transmission into ERS 3 (third gear), the transmission will never shift above third gear, but can shift
down to 2 (second) or 1 (first), when needed.
3.6L Engine
When in the DRIVE position, the first tap to the left (-)
will shift down one gear and will display that gear. For
example, if you are in DRIVE and are in fifth gear, when
you tap the shift lever one time to the left (-), the
transmission will downshift to fourth gear and the display will show 4. Another tap to the left (-) will shift the
transmission into third gear.
5.7L Engine
On vehicles equipped with the 5.7L engine, use of ERS (or
TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during throughgear accelerations. This additional gear improves vehicle
performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer
on certain grades. ERS 1, 2, and 3 are underdrive gears;
• If you push and hold (not tap) the shift lever to the
ERS 4 is direct drive. ERS 5 (Overdrive) is the same as the
right (+), the transmission will exit the gear limiting
normal 4th gear. When in the DRIVE position in first
mode and shift to the appropriate gear. The display
through fourth gear, the first tap to the left (-) will display
will read ⬙D⬙.
NOTE:
• If you pull and hold (not tap) the shift lever to the left
(-), the transmission will downshift to the lowest gear
that can be attained without overrevving the engine.
The display will show the gear the vehicle is in and
will limit the top gear to the one displayed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
the ERS designation for the current gear (the transmission will not downshift). For example, if you are in
DRIVE and are in third (direct) gear, when you tap the
shift lever one time to the left (-), the display will show 4
(ERS 4 is direct gear). Another tap to the left (-) will shift
the transmission down to ERS 3 (the added underdrive
gear). When in the DRIVE position in fifth gear, the first
tap to the left (-) will downshift the transmission and
display 5 (ERS 5 is the same as normal fourth gear).
Another tap to the left (-) will shift the transmission
down to ERS 4 (direct gear).
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid.
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1
1
2
1-2
3
1-3
4
1-4
5*
1-5
D
1-5
* Applies to vehicles equipped with 5.7L engines only.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever to the
left “D(-)” and hold it there. The transmission will shift to
the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed
down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear for 3.6L engine, fourth
and fifth gears for 5.7L engine). The transmission will
automatically shift to Overdrive, if the following conditions are present:
• the shift lever is in DRIVE;
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem- If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
perature;
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
temperature becomes hot enough, the “TRANSMISSION
(48 km/h);
OVER TEMP” message may display, and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmis• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated;
sion cools down. After cool down, the transmission will
• transmission has reached normal operating temperature.
resume normal operation.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temThe transmission will downshift from Overdrive, to the
peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
most desirable gear, if the accelerator pedal is fully
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
pressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
(56 km/h).
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer to the “Note” under When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode – If Equipped
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section.
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting ocDuring cold temperature operation you may notice decurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch. This will improve
layed upshifts, depending on engine and transmission
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
temperature. This feature improves the warm-up time of
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
the engine and transmission.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
operating in TOW/HAUL mode, the transmission will normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired,
shift into direct gear and Overdrive will be enabled the switch must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
under steady cruise conditions.
In high ambient temperatures with sustained high engine
speed and load, an upshift, followed shortly thereafter by
a downshift, may occur. The “TOW/HAUL Indicator
Light” will turn off. This is a normal part of the overheat
protection strategy when operating in the TOW/HAUL
mode.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, the Transmission Limp Home
Mode will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission
TOW/HAUL Switch
will remain in the current gear (3.6L engine) or in direct
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the gear (5.7L engine) until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been
1. Stop the vehicle.
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position.
cally, at a calibrated speed, at light throttle. It engages at
3. Turn the engine off, and be sure to turn the ignition
higher speeds under heavier acceleration. This may reswitch to the LOCK position.
sult in a slightly different feeling or response during
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the en- normal operation in high gear. When the vehicle speed
drops below a calibrated speed, or during acceleration,
gine.
the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear range.
NOTE:
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
• The torque converter clutch may not engage until the
return to normal operation. If the problem persists,
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usuPARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operally after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
ate. Only second gear (3.6L engine) or third gear (5.7L
Because the engine speed is higher when the torque
engine) will be available in the DRIVE position. Have the
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon
transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold.
as possible.
This is normal. Manually shifting (using the ERS shift
control) between 4 (direct gear) and 5/D (Overdrive
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
gear) positions will demonstrate that the transmission
is able to shift into and out of Overdrive. For vehicles
with 5.7L engines (which have two Overdrive gears),
the transmission may not shift into the top Overdrive
gear (normal fifth gear) until the transmission fluid
and engine coolant are warm.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Quadra-Trac I姞 Operating Instructions/
Precautions – If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac I威 is a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time fourwheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
to wheels with traction.
• If the vehicle has not been driven in several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
NOTE: The Quadra-Trac I威 system is not appropriate
cause damage to the transmission. The torque confor conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended.
verter will refill within five seconds after starting the
Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operengine.
ating” for further information.
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
Quadra-Trac II姞 Operating Instructions/
• 4WD HI
Precautions – If Equipped
• NEUTRAL
The Quadra-Trac II威 transfer case is fully automatic in the
normal driving 4WD AUTO mode. The Quadra-Trac II威 • 4WD LOW
transfer case provides three mode positions:
This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode.
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
Transfer Case Switch
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI
position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends Shift Positions
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
cause damage to the transfer case.
4WD AUTO
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
This range is used on surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
sand, and dry hard pavement.
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain威 – If Equipped” in “StartWARNING!
ing and Operating” for further information on the various positions and their intended usages.
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N NEUTRAL
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position from the powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing”
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It locks the
front and rear driveshafts together and forces the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. It provides
additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain威 – If Equipped” for
further information on the various positions and their
intended usages.
Shifting Procedures
4WD HI to 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the
“4WD LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster
will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is
complete.
Transfer Case Switch
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put
Trans in N Press 4 Low” message will flash from the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
4WD LOW to 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the
“4WD LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster
will flash and go out when the shift is complete.
NOTE:
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer
case motor temperature protection condition exists, a
“For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put Trans
in N Press 4 Low” message will flash from the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow
the shift.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, engine off.
2. Vehicle stopped, with foot on brake.
3. Place the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen,
etc.) for four seconds until the LED light by the switch
starts to blink indicating shift in progress. The light will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the NEUTRAL shift is
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
complete. A “To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
Procedure in Owners Manual” message will display on
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Neutral Switch
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
Owners Manual” message will flash from the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Quadra-Drive姞 II System – If Equipped
The optional Quadra-Drive威 II System features two
torque transfer couplings. The couplings include an
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle and
the Quadra-Trac II威 transfer case. The optional ELSD axle
is fully automatic and requires no driver input to operate.
Under normal driving conditions, the unit functions as a
standard axle, balancing torque evenly between left and
right wheels. With a traction difference between left and
right wheels, the coupling will sense a speed difference.
As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other, torque
will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less
traction, to the wheel that has traction. While the transfer
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
case and axle coupling differ in design, their operation is
similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II威 transfer case shifting
information, preceding this section, for shifting this
system.
SELEC-TERRAIN™ — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Selec-Terrain™ combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains.
5
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
Selec-Terrain™ consists of the following positions:
• Sport – Dry weather, on-road calibration. Only available in 4WD High range. Performance based tuning
that provides a rear wheel drive feel but with improved handling and acceleration over a two-wheel
drive vehicle. The Electronic Stability Control will set
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
to allow more driver control of vehicle while maintaining safe handling controls. The vehicle will lower (if
equipped with Air Suspension) to Aero Mode in High
Range. 4WD Low is not available in SPORT mode, if
4WD Low is selected the Selec-Terrain™ will auto•
matically switch back to AUTO.
traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles. If equipped with air suspension, the
level will change to NRH.
Sand/Mud – Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding
may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic
brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with air
suspension, the level will change to Off-Road 1.
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
such as snow. When in Snow mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission may
use second gear (rather than first gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If equipped
• Rock – Off-road calibration only available in 4WD
with air suspension, the level will change to Normal
Low range. The vehicle is raised (if equipped with Air
Ride Height (NRH) if the transfer case is in high range.
Suspension) for improved ground clearance. Traction
The level will change to Off-Road 1 if the transfer case
based tuning with improved steer-ability for use on
is in Low range.
high traction off-road surfaces. Activates the Hill De• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
scent Control for steep downhill control. Use for low
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
equipped with air suspension, the vehicle level will
change to Off-Road 2. If the Selec-Terrain™ switch is in
ROCK mode, and the transfer case is switched from
4WD Low to 4WD High, the Selec-Terrain™ system
will return to AUTO.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
QUADRA-LIFT™ — IF EQUIPPED
5
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Up Button
Down Button
Park Mode Indicator Lamp
Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp
Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp
Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp
Description
The Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system provides full
time load leveling capability along with the benefit of
being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a • Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
button.
driving.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately
OR1. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
1.3 in (33 mm) – This position should be the default
and Operating” for further information.
position for all off-road driving until OR2 is needed. A
smoother and more comfortable ride will result. Press
• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 0.5 in
the “Up” button once from the NRH position while the
(13 mm) – This position provides improved aerodyvehicle speed is below 48 mph (77 km/h). When in the
namics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will
OR1 position, if the vehicle speed remains between
automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle
40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater
speed remains between 62 mph (99 km/h) and 66 mph
than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph
(106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
(80 km/h), the vehicle will be automatically lowered
speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will
to NRH. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed
and Operating” for further information.
remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately
(56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
2.6 in (65 mm) – This position is intended for offspeed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h). The vehicle will
roading use only where maximum ground clearance is
enter Aero Mode, regardless of vehicle speed if the
required. To enter OR2, press the “Up” button twice
Selec-Terrain™ knob is turned to the “SPORT” posifrom the NRH position or once from the OR1 position
tion. Turning the Selec-Terrain™ knob to the “AUTO”
while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While
position will return the system to normal operation.
in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
• Park Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 1.5 in
(38 mm) – This position lowers the vehicle for easier
passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of
the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo.
To enter Park Mode, press the “Down” button once
while the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h)
the vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle
speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph
(40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Park Mode
change will be cancelled. To exit Park Mode, press the
“Up” button once while in Park Mode or drive the
vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h).
air suspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain™” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
The Selec-Terrain™ switch will automatically change the
vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the
Selec-Terrain™ switch. The height can be changed from
the default Selec-Terrain™ setting by normal use of the
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the
air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure
a proper appearance.
The system requires that the engine be running for all
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors,
including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is opened
at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will
not be completed until the open door(s) is closed.
The Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system uses a lifting
and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from
incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising
the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and
then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will
move down first and then the rear.
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-Lift™ air
suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Press and hold both the
“Up” and “Down” buttons simultaneously between 5 and
10 seconds, a message will appear in the EVIC stating
leveling has been disabled immediately after both buttons
have been released. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. Driving the vehicle over
5 mph (8 km/h) will return the air suspension to normal
operation. Refer to “Jacking and Tire Changing” in “What
To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal injury or damage to the system, see your
authorized dealer for service.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
has been detected.
Operation
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show
the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator
lamps will show a position which the system is working
to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are
flashing on the “Up” button, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing on the
⬙Up⬙ button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
Pressing the “UP” button once will move the suspension
one position higher from the current position, assuming
all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, speed below
threshold, etc). The “UP” button can be pressed multiple
times, each press will raise the requested level by one
position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest
position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle
speed, etc).
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps
and EVIC messages will operate the same for automatic
changes and user requested changes.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 4, 5, and 6 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
Pressing the “DOWN” button once will move the suspension one position lower from the current level, as- • Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamp 4 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in this position.
suming all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, doors
closed, speed below threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button
• Park Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated
can be pressed multiple times. Each press will lower the
when the vehicle is in Park Mode. If Park Mode is
requested level by one position down to a minimum of
requested while vehicle speed is between 15 mph
Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicator lamp 4
current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
will remain on solid and indicator lamp 3 will flash as
the system waits for the vehicle to reduce speed. If
vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off and indicator
lamp 3 will flash until Park Mode is achieved at which
point indicator lamp 3 will go solid. If during the
height change to Park Mode, the vehicle speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h), the height change will be paused
until the vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) and the height change continues to Park
Mode, or exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) and the vehicle
height will return to NRH. Park Mode may be selected
while the vehicle is not moving provided that the
engine is still running and all doors remain closed.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
NOTE: Prior to off-road driving, remove the front air
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
dam to prevent damage. The front air dam is attached to
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
the lower front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
and can be removed by hand.
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
or terrain be selected. The vehicle height should then be
raised as required by the changes in terrain.
The Selec-Terrain™ switch will automatically change the
vehicle to the optimized height based on the SelecTerrain™ switch position. The vehicle height can be
changed from the default height for each Selec-Terrain™
mode by normal use of the air suspension switches. Refer
to “Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range – If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
Front Air Dam
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
1 — Front Bumper
2 — Front Air Dam Fasteners
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest 4WD LOW range.
useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving through water more than a few inches/
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
water, there are a number of precautions that must be safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
considered before entering the water.
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
NOTE: Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing small rivers or
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
streams. To maintain optimal performance of your vehito minimize wave effects.
cle’s heating and ventilation system it is recommended to
switch the system into recirculation mode during water Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
fording.
run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes
CAUTION!
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm).
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
The flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering,
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Drivthat are downstream of your entry point to allow for
ing through water may cause damage that may not be
drifting.
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a
lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction
will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
allowing the compression braking of the engine to help
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control Traction Downhill
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly
skidding the tires.
down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
WARNING!
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or vehicle speed and direction.
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back care- repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmisfully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
sion whenever possible.
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
After Driving Off-Road
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
drive straight up or down.
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a can get any problems taken care of right away and have
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion your vehicle ready when you need it.
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
traction to complete the climb.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
correct the situation.
propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
POWER STEERING
3.6L Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
while parking and good feel while driving. If the electrohydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
system will provide mechanical steering capability.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it
indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have
occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in
the power steering system. You will lose power steering
assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe,
then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments
until the light turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM” • Even if power steering assistance is no longer operamessage and a flashing icon are displayed on
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer
and during parking maneuvers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steerservice.
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
5.7L Engine
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
The standard power steering system will give you good
does not in any way damage the steering system.
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
WARNING!
steering capability if power assist is lost.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condiService should be obtained as soon as possible.
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
CAUTION!
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
MULTI-DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS)
(IF EQUIPPED) — 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
5
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
The foot operated parking brake is located below the switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the the instrument cluster will illuminate.
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Brake Lock Differential
(BLD), Ready Alert Braking, Rain Brake Support and, if it
has four-wheel drive with the MP 3023 two-speed transfer case, Hill Descent Control (HDC).
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section for further information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift
will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed High Range (Four-Wheel Drive Models) or
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD HIGH
range and in two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the
vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is
shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to
4WD HIGH range, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
The ESC system has two available operating modes in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
4WD HIGH range and two-wheel drive vehicles, and one
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
operating mode in 4WD LOW range.
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
4WD Low Range
Partial Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW
range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from
4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range, the
ESC system will be in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC OFF Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backTowing With HSA
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when when pulling a trailer.
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in
PARK and using the parking brake, it will roll
down the hill and could cause a collision with
another vehicle or object. Always remember to use
the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that
the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec(Continued) tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ready Alert Braking – If Equipped
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — Four-Wheel Drive
Models With MP3023 Two-Speed Transfer Case
Only
HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills
during off-road driving situations and is available in 4WD
Rain Brake Support – If Equipped
LOW range only. To enable HDC, press the HDC switch
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance or put the Selec-Terrain™ system in “ROCK” mode
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small (“ROCK” mode is only available in 4WD LOW range).
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the
driving conditions. The speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected.
HDC operation can be overridden with brake application
to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed.
Conversely, if more speed is desired during HDC control,
the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the
usual manner. When either the brake or the accelerator is
released, HDC will control the vehicle back to the original set speed.
Hill Descent Switch
When HDC is enabled, the HDC icon will be illuminated
in the instrument cluster. HDC will automatically apply
the brakes to control downhill speed to the selected level
when necessary on grades greater than approximately
8%. It will usually not activate on level ground.
HDC Operation in 4WD Low Range
To enable HDC, press the HDC switch or put the
Selec-Terrain™ system in the “ROCK” mode. The HDC
icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster and
HDC will function. If the vehicle speed goes above
20 mph (32 km/h), the HDC icon will flash and HDC will
not function. To disable HDC, press the HDC switch.
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD Low Range Set Speeds
• 1st = 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
• 2nd = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 3rd = 4 mph (6 km/h)
• 4th = 5.5 mph (9 km/h)
• 5th or D (Drive) = 7.5 mph (12 km/h)
• REVERSE = 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
• NEUTRAL = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• PARK = HDC will not function
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving only.
At vehicle speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h), HDC will no
longer function. When the vehicle speed drops below
20 mph (32 km/h), HDC function will automatically
resume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set
speed.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should turn off with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho- NOTE:
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momendiagnosed and corrected.
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acwhen ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
that caused the ESC activation.
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designastandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
5
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Loading
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
the weight referenced here.
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuexceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
calculated in Step 4.
on your vehicle’s placard.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
manual to determine how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
NOTE:
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage it.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
outside temperature condition.
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres- build-up, or your tire pressure will be too low.
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial-Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaways use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
WARNING!
authorized dealer for radial tire repairs.
High speed driving with your vehicle at or above
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on
Wheel – If Equipped
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
The spare tire of your vehicle is equivalent in look and
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
function as the original equipment tire and wheel found
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
75 mph (120 km/h).
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original
equipment tire and wheel, refer to the recommended tire
rotation pattern in “Tire Rotation Recommendations” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching temporary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
with one of the following types of non-matching temporary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
Do not install more than one non-matching temporary driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
use spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip- Full Size Spare – If Equipped
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. Do
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel on
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
the vehicle at any given time
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Tire Spinning
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).
first opportunity.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the
speed.
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon various
factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your
tires. The service description and load identification will
be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
• Due to limited clearance, use SAE class “S” low profile
cables or traction devices only. Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 #SZ 441 cables or equivalent are
recommended.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 1⁄2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. All season tires satisfy this requirement and can be indicated by the M+S designation on the
tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
(Continued) safety and handling of your vehicle.
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
different loads and perform different steering, handling, The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at shown in the following diagram.
unequal rates.
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
Tire Rotation
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has
been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off. The
system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still
be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
NOTE:
the tire.
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire Base System
failure or condition.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
while adjusting your tire pressure.
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes readings to the Receiver Module.
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and check the tire pressure in all of your tires, and to maintain
the proper pressure.
stopping ability.
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish, once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Moniand off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
toring Telltale Light to illuminate, a warning message to
system fault is detected. In addition, a “SERVICE TPM
appear, or the chime to sound.
SYSTEM” message may be displayed for approximately
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 5 seconds when a system fault is detected, and a chime
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “TIRE LOW will sound. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence
PRESSURE” message will display in the instru- will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
ment cluster for 5 seconds, and an audible chime will be Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when
activated, when one or more of the four active road tire the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as occur by any of the following:
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
recommended cold placard pressure value. The system
sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
that affects radio wave signals.
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid. In addition, a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
sage will be displayed for 75 seconds. For each subsehousings.
quent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, a “SER4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
VICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed for
75 seconds, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in on solid. Once you repair or replace the original road tire,
the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
tire pressure. If you install the spare tire, in place of a TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure
road tire, that has a pressure below the low-pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire
warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any
chime will sound, a “TIRE LOW PRESSURE” message of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
will be displayed in the instrument cluster for 60 seconds, driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn order for the TPMS to receive this information.
ON. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Premium System – If Equipped
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an auwheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
dible chime will be activated, when one or more of
readings to the Receiver Module.
the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain (Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for a
minimum of five seconds, and a graphic display of the
the proper pressure.
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Unfollowing components:
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa• Receiver Module
tion.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure.
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ fault is detected possibly related to the trigger component an incorrect sensor location fault. In this case, the
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is then followed by a
graphic display, with pressure values still shown. This
indicates the pressure values are still being received from
the TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the
correct vehicle position. However, the system still needs
to be serviced as long as the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message exists.
the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value. For each subsequent ignition
switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display
a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in
value. Once you repair or replace the original road tire,
the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
tire pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road
TPMS will update automatically.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pres- In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
sure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
will sound, and the EVIC will still display a “flashing” new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
pressure value in the graphic display. After driving the tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
3.6L Engine
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
This engine is designed to meet all emisfollowing conditions:
sions regulations and provide excellent
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso• This device must accept any interference received,
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
including interference that may cause undesired
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
operation.
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the these engines.
following licenses:
5.7L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emisUnited States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRXC4W4MA4
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2546A-C4W4MA4
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is Reformulated Gasoline
not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
regular gasoline in these engines.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are speLight spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
prove air quality.
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoas hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will proence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold driveability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
Problems that result from using gasoline containing E-85 perform the following:
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
• change the engine oil and oil filter
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
• disconnect and reconnect the battery
not be covered under warranty.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containMore extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
exposure to E-85 fuel.
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
5
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
5
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
E-85 Fuel Cap
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
E-85 Badge
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that
alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be
avoided.
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
than 1/4 full
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
refueling
Techron may be used.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
a period of at least 5 minutes
(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formuObserving these precautions will avoid possible hard
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
during warm up.
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer requires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
NOTE:
• When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C), requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
you may experience hard starting and rough idle contains additional requirements, developed during exfollowing start up even if the above recommendations tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
are followed.
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
CAUTION!
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door,
on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
5
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler
cap.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler Cap
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the left rear storage bin cover.
3. Pull the release cable.
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the month, day, and
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry, including
the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and
cargo.
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Inflation Pressure
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Curb Weight
Each axle’s GAWR is determined by the components in The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
components, sometimes specified by purchasers for in- loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
creased durability, does not necessarily increase the ve- values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
hicle’s GVWR.
added.
Tire Size
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on Loading
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
capacity of this tire size.
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the total
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect review this information to tow your load as efficiently
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way and safely as possible.
the brakes operate.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or
more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
further information.
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
allowance for the presence of a driver.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- Weight-Carrying Hitch
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
information.
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
WARNING!
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumIt is important that you do not exceed the maximum
sized trailers.
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% When used in accordance with the manufacturers’ direcor more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider tions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control, thereby enhancing
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
Frontal Area
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crossThe frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
winds, and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weightdistributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for
heavier trailer tongue weights (TW) and may be required
depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration/loading
to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, and braking performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) with the
optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized
dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Model
Model
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
500 lbs (227 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
740 lbs (336 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
3.6L
4x2
8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
3.6L
4x4
8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
5.7L
4x2
13,100 lbs (5 942 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
5.7L
4x4
13,100 lbs (5 942 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to
“Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. The addition of passengers
and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo
(to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs
(1 678 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels, or heavier in the
rear, can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions. Never exceed the maximum
tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.
5
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
• The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and
Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).
(Continued)
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to − Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres− An electronically-actuated trailer brake controller is
sures before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
a hydraulic surge-actuated brake system, an electronic
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper
brake controller is not required.
inspection procedure.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor1,000 lbs (454 kg), and required for trailers in excess of
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in a collision.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package includes a seven–pin connector
at the rear of the vehicle and a four-pin harness located
under the rear bumper. The four-pin harness must be
(Continued) unclipped before use. Use a factory-approved trailer
harness and connector.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Seven-Pin Connector
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
The transmission fluid and filter should be changed if
you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes
of continuous operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the
TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped), or a lower gear range,
should be selected.
NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level before towing
(5.7L engine).
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped) or − When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
selecting a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range
you can get back to cruising speed.
Select (ERS) feature) while operating the vehicle under
heavy operating conditions, will improve performance
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shiftmaximize fuel efficiency.
ing and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
SNOW PLOW
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
heating, take the following actions:
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
− City Driving
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectWhen stopped for short periods of time, shift the transedly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheel OFF the
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Front
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear
OK
NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer
ALL
OK
OK
NOTE:Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift™ must be lowered to the “Park” (lowest) level, and have automatic
leveling disabled, before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Quadra-Lift™
– If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for more information. If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the “Park”
level (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to
follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or loss of proper tie-down tension.
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towRecreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
will result.
7. Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is away from the battery post.
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. Place the transmission in Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I姞
PARK.
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Drive
Models
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the unlocked OFF position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — Quadra–
Trac II姞 /Quadra–Drive姞 II Four-Wheel Drive
Models
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be placed in PARK for recreational
towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to
the transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when recreational towing.
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• The transmission must be placed in PARK for
recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to
be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.
(Continued)
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission to PARK.
2. Turn OFF the ignition.
3. For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, remove the
Keyless Enter-N-Go button and use the key fob to
complete this procedure. Refer to “Starting Procedures/
Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
7. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press and hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral)
button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds,
until the light behind the N symbol starts to blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking
(stay on solid) when the shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” mesNeutral Switch
sage will display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Infor8. Start the engine.
mation Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument 9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
Panel” for further information.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Turn OFF the engine.
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
12. Firmly apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 6 are requirements that must be met
13. Shift the transmission into PARK and remove the key
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
fob.
continue to be met until the four seconds elapse and
the shift has been completed. If any of these requireCAUTION!
ments are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N)
button or are no longer met during the four second
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transtimer, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is off prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
tow bar.
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
15. Release the parking brake.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will no longer
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for be displayed on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information
normal usage.
Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it confurther information.
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the key fob to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
5
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press and hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral)
button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds,
until the light behind the N symbol starts to blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking
(go out) when shift is complete. The “FOUR WHEEL
Neutral Switch
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL NOTE:
(N), turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid • Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
gear clash.
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
7. Shift the transmission into PARK.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer
8. Release the brake pedal.
met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
9. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
10. Start the engine.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
12. Release the parking brake.
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
13. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
11. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. The Keyless Enter-N-Go button (if equipped) may • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
now be reinstalled if desired. Refer to “Starting
Procedures/Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 475
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
▫ Towing Without The Ignition Key FOB . . . . . 479
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
6
462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — slow down.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
speed.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
an impending overheat condition:
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists.
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
6
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Jack Storage Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear
cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing
nut.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
7. For vehicle equipped with Quadra-Lift威 refer to
“Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further information on disabling automatic
leveling.
6
466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
(Continued)
Jack Warning Label
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is still
on the ground.
6
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack and Tool Assembly
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. For the front axle, place the jack and protective cap on
the body flange just behind the front tire as indicated by
the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do
not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
Front Jacking Location
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
5. For a rear tire, place the jack and protective cap in the
slot on the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear
tire (as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on
the sill molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are
sure the jack is fully engaged.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469
6
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
Rear Jacking Location
470 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
wheel nut tightness is 110 ft lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
station.
Lightly tighten the nuts.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return
it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam tray.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 471
12. Securely store the road wheel and jack in the cargo
area.
special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m), reinstall the
jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the rear load floor
cover.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
Stowed Spare
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with the pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
6
472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack Preparations For Jump-Start
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
precautions.
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 473
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
6
474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
the reverse sequence:
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 475
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
of the vehicle.
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posiNOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
tive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle damage to the vehicle.
you should have the battery and charging system inWARNING!
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
6
476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully remove
the shift lever override access cover, located on the
bottom of the cupholder.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
without starting the engine.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
3. Remove the rubber liner from the cupholder (located 5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
next to the shifter on the center console).
6. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold
the shift lock lever down.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477
7. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
9. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover and
install the rubber liner into the cupholder.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift™ must be
lowered to the Park (lowest) level, and have automatic
leveling disabled, before tying them down (from the
body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to the section on
Quadra-Lift™ for more information. If the vehicle cannot
be lowered to the Park level (for example, engine will not
run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the
body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause
fault codes to be set and/or loss of proper tie-down
tension.
6
478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift or Dolly
Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF
the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
2WD Models
4WD Models
If transmission is operable:
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under “Starting and Operating”
• Trans in NEUTRAL
• Trans in PARK
• 30 mph max(48 km/h)
• T/case in NEUTRAL
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see Brake/
Transmission Interlock Manual Override (under Starting
and Operating, Automatic Transmission) for instructions
on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK
position for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position,
not in the LOCK position.
Towing Without the Ignition Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
6
480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF
the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is
in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift
or towing dolly.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when towing.
• Failure to follow these towing methods could
result in damage to the transmission and/or transfer case. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment – 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
䡵 Engine Compartment – 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System – OBD II . . . . . . . 485
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 485
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
7
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
▫ Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 527
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 520
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . 531
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 534
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
— Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM – OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
soon as possible.
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
7
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
problem continues, the message will appear the next time system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacethe vehicle is started.
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
PROGRAMS
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
happen:
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the REPLACEMENT PARTS
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
you may need to do nothing more than drive your warranty.
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
7
488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off, or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the SAFE level range. Adding 1 U.S. Quart
(0.95L) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE
range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE
range.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
7
490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
been certified by the American
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
manufacturer only recommends
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
API Certified engine oils.
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multiple Displacement System (MDS).
Refer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Lubricants, which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- Lubricants, which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number, should not be used.
ber, should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 5.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating Synthetic Engine Oils
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
quality requirements are met, and the recommended
maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
7
492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Materials Added to Engine Oils
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high-quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high-quality
oil filters and are recommended.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Engine Air Cleaner Filter
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
environment. Contact your local authorized dealer, ser- maintenance intervals.
vice station, or governmental agency for advice on how
and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded
in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every oil change.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
7
494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt condition should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.
7
496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product.
However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt
or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497
Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the
windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully
upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
7
498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the
blade holder.
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty and contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze), other than
the specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze),
may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be replaced with
the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
7
504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/ Coolant 5–Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT
(Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentraAdding Coolant
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
(-37°C) are anticipated.
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
to 5 Years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before replace(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
period, it is important that you use the same engine
engine cooling system.
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOrganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac(antifreeze).
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove
the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
7
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals and children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
adequate. With the engine idling, and warm to normal
operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap, unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
condenser clean.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
freezing.
mileage, and increased emissions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle Brake System
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be periodically inspected.
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
maintenance intervals.
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
7
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” dot and
a “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be kept within these
two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark, because
leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
(Continued) The front axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
hole.
7
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then
and cause them to leak.
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage
them and cause them to leak.
Selection of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill Transfer Case
hole.
Fluid Level Check
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axles with aluminum found, the transfer case fluid level can be checked by
housings. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be removing the filler plug located on the back side of the
tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with transfer case. The fluid level should be at the bottom edge
of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level
cast iron housings.
position.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
Adding Fluid
Selection of Lubricant
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole, Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
when the vehicle is in a level position.
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom- Automatic Transmission
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
Selection of Lubricant
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perforCAUTION!
mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transWhen installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informadamage them and cause them to leak.
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid.
7
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check – 3.6L Engine
Regular fluid level checks are not required. For this
reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or transmission slippage or
Special Additives
malfunction, have your authorized dealer check the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
transmission fluid level.
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
Fluid Level Check – 5.7L Engine
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature. This occurs after at least 15 miles
(25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the
fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
To check the fluid level properly, the following procedure
must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position
ending with the shift lever in PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
7
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the dipstick again, and note the fluid level on
CAUTION!
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat- Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
ing temperature. The fluid level is only valid if there is a (10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. If the
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
fluid is low, add as required into the dipstick tube. Do produce an accurate reading.
not overfill. After adding any quantity of oil through the
oil fill tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to 7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
fluid level.
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room tem- dipstick tube.
perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
clear water.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumuWhat Causes Corrosion?
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains, and to
The most common causes are:
protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
paint.
• Stone and gravel impact.
7
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be kept
finish.
clear and open.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
a month.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Special Care
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorized
dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure –
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only
MOPAR威 cleaners or equivalent are recommended. Do
not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage
the wheels’ protective finish.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
7
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
upholstery and carpeting.
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condiInterior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent,
WARNING!
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
clean vinyl upholstery.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
Leather Seat Care And Cleaning
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomCleaning Headlights
mended for leather upholstery.
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
Plastic is not as scratch-resistant as glass and therefore
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
Glass Surfaces
rag.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
Seat Belt Maintenance
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
directly on the mirror.
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
7
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment. This center contains cartridge fuses
and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the
cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover
that corresponds to the following chart.
Totally Integrated Power Module
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J01
40 Amp
Green
J02
30 Amp
Pink
Mini
Fuse
Description
Air Suspension
Power Liftgate Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J03
30 Amp
Pink
J04
25 Amp
Natural
J05
25 Amp
Natural
J06
40 Amp
Green
J07
J08
J09
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
Mini
Fuse
Description
Trailer Tow
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door Node
Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability Control System
Antilock Brakes
Valve/Stability Control
System
Power Seat
E-Brake
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J10
30 Amp
Pink
J11
30 Amp
Pink
J12
30 Amp
Pink
J13
60 Amp
Yellow
J14
20 Amp
Blue
J15
40 Amp
Green
J17
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
Description
Headlamp Wash Relay
Contact
Drive Train Control
Module
Rear Defroster
Main Ignition Off
Draw (IOD)
Trailer Tow Lamps/
Park Lamps
Front Cabin Fan/
Blower
Starter Motor Solenoid
7
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J18
20 Amp
Blue
J19
60 Amp
Yellow
J20
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
J21
J22
M1
Mini
Fuse
Description
Powertrain Control
Module/Powertrain
Control Module Transmission Range
Radiator Fan Motor
HI/Radiator Fan Motor Low
Front Wiper
Front/Rear Washer
Control
Sunroof Module
15 Amp Stop Lamps
Blue
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Description
Fuse
Fuse
M2
20 Amp Electronic Limit Slip
Yellow Differential/Air Suspension
M3
20 Amp Liftgate/Headrest
Yellow
M5
25 Amp 115V AC Power InNatural verter
M6
20 Amp Cigar Lighter
Yellow
M7
20 Amp Power Outlet #2 (SwitYellow chable)
M8
20 Amp Front Heated Seat &
Yellow Steering Wheel
M9
20 Amp Rear Heated Seats
Yellow
M10
15 Amp Video/Universal GaBlue
rage Door Opener
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Description
Fuse
Fuse
M11
10 Amp Heating, Ventilation &
Red
Air Conditioning (Climate Control System)
M12
30 Amp Radio/Amplifier
Green
M13
20 Amp Instrument Cluster
Yellow
M14
20 Amp Back Up Camera
Yellow
M15
20 Amp Power Seat
Yellow Module(s)/Adaptive
Cruise Control/Audio
Telematics/Daytime
Running Lights Relay/
Air Suspension
Module/Instrument
Cluster
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M16
10 Amp
Red
M19
25 Amp
Natural
M20
15 Amp
Blue
M21
20 Amp
Yellow
M22
10 Amp
Red
M23
10 Amp
Red
M24
25 Amp
Natural
M25
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Automatic Shutdown
1 and 2
Instrument Cluster
Automatic Shutdown
3
Horns (Low/High) –
Right
Horns (Low/High) –
Left
Rear Wiper
Fuel Pump Motor
Output/Diesel Lift
Pump (Export Only)
7
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M26
10 Amp
Red
M27
10 Amp
Red
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
Description
Driver Door Switch
Bank
Ignition Switch/
Wireless Control
Module/Keyless Entry
Module
15 Amp Powertrain Controller/
Blue
Transmission Controller
10 Amp Tire Pressure Monitor
Red
15 Amp J1962 Diag Connector
Blue
20 Amp Backup Lamps
Yellow
10 Amp Occupant Restraint
Red
Controller
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Description
Fuse
Fuse
M33
10 Amp Powertrain Controller/
Red
Transmission Controller
M34
10 Amp Park Assist Module/
Red
Climate Control System Module/Infra Red
Sensor/Compass Module
M35
15 Amp Left Rear Parklamps
Blue
M36
20 Amp Power Outlet
Yellow
M37
10 Amp Antilock Brakes/
Red
Stability Control System Module
M38
25 Amp All Door Lock &UnNatural lock
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
CAUTION!
• When installing the totally integrated power module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the totally
integrated power module and possibly result in a
electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may:
• Remove fuse #27 in the Totally Integrated Power
Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD#1).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Lights
Bulb Type
Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Grab Handle Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . VT4976
Rear Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214–2
Visor Vanity Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) . . . . . . . 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Exterior Lights
Bulb Type
Aux Aperature Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 7440 (W21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W3W
Front Park/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T20
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Headlamps (Low Beam) – High Intensity
Discharge (HID) . . . D1S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Headlamps (Low Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11
Headlamps (High Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Liftgate Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Turn/Stop/Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) –
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminIf Equipped
ishes and becomes more white after approximately
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
10 seconds, as the system charges.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
1. Open the hood.
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
an authorized dealer for service.
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
BULB REPLACEMENT
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
7
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal
Front Fog Lamps
1. Open the hood.
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connec2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn countertor.
clockwise to remove from housing.
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the
bulb.
front fog lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with
the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back of
the front fog lamp housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
engaged in the slots of the collar.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
7
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from
lamp.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Once lower trim is loose, close the liftgate.
4. Open the flipper glass.
5. Pull up glass seal at bottom of window opening.
6. Remove small trim panel around liftgate glass striker.
7. Close flipper glass and raise the liftgate.
8. Continue removing the trim.
9. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
10. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
clockwise.
11. Remove/replace bulb(s).
12. Reinstall the socket(s)
13. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
7
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear License Lamp
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
snap tab to remove the license lamp lens.
2. Pull bulb from socket.
3. Replace bulb.
4. Reinstall lens.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified)
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer
Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer
Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
24 Gallons
91 Liters
6 Quarts
7 Quarts
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
10.4 Quarts
9.9 Liters
15.4 Quarts
14.6 Liters
7
16 Quarts
15.2 Liters
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.031 in [0.79 mm])
LZFR5C–11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353 or equivalent.
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier additive.
Axle Differential (Rear) – 5.7L Engine With Electronic Limited-Slip
Differential (ELSD)
Axle Differential (Rear) – 5.7L EnWe recommend you use MOPAR威 GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
gine Without Electronic Limited-Slip SAE 75W-85.
Differential (ELSD)
Brake Master Cylinder
MOPAR威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent.
7
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component
Power Steering Reservoir – 3.6L
Engine
Power Steering Reservoir – 5.7L
Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS-1165, such as Fuchs
EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 539
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
538 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
S anytime a malfunction is suspected.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be discomes first.
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 539 M
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
master cylinder, power steering and transmission
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in(5.7L only) and add as needed.
formation.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a At Each Oil Change
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
• Change the engine oil filter.
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or Required Maintenance Intervals
damage.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 540 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
N
T 6 Months Maintenance Service
E Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 541 M
24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 542 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
N
T 30 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 543 M
56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 544 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
T
E ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 64,000 miles (104 000 km).
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
A ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
N ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
C ❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
E ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 545 M
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km)
whichever comes first.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 546 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 547 M
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Replace the spark plugs (3.6L Engine).
Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.†
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 548 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
N
T 78 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 549 M
120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 550 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
A
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
C ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
E ❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏
❏
❏
❏
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Change the transfer case fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 551 M
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
552 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 555
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 556
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 556
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
9
554 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 555
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
556 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (877) 426–5337
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
In Mexico contact:
center.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 557
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800485-2001).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
9
558 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 559
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov.
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
560 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
information that students and professional technicians
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vemaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
Call toll free at:
and charts.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 561
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
562 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
564 INDEX
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . 167
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 492
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324,328
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,77
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,76,81,98,248
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,74,77
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 72,74,77
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21,256
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 21
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 328
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350,511
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
INDEX 565
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512,513
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 221 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 95
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526,527
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 26 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,98 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Caps, Filler
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,428
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
10
566 INDEX
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,323
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,83,88,91
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,88
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289,298
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 313
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
INDEX 567
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 506
. . . . . . . . . . . . 506
. . . . . . . . . . . . 503
. . . . . . . . . . . . 502
. . . . . . . . . . . . 506
. . . . . . . . . . . . 505
. . . . . . . . . . . . 505
. . . . . . . . . 503,533
. . . . . . . . . . . . 167
. . . . . . . . . . . . 228
. . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,326,333
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Disposal
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Used Engine Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . 273
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 320
10
568 INDEX
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 221
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483,484
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 483,484
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,97,428
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . 163,167
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424,533
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Multi-Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,258
Emergency, In Case of
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489,533
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490,533
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 486
INDEX 569
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,250,528,530
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429,430
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Flipper Glass, Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fluid Level Checks
Filters
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 511,512,513
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 78
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,97,428
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,499
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
10
570 INDEX
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 534
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,528
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357,363
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,436
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Light . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added .
Methanol . . . . . .
Requirements . . .
Saver Mode . . . .
Tank Capacity . .
Fuel Optimizer . . .
Fuel Saver . . . . . . .
Fuel System Caution
Fuel, Flexible . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
268
427
425
533
273
533
273
273
434
429
520
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,436,485
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
INDEX 571
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,28,188,424
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437,439
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436,439
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect™)
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
121
462
527
527
518
147
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . .
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Key Removal . .
Illuminated Entry . . . . .
Immobilizer (Sentry Key)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
527
111
324
348
250
390
250
387
443
228
208
144
. . 16
14,16
. . 16
. . 23
. . 19
10
572 INDEX
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,83
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247,248
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463,466
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,277,344
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,277
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 86,88
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
INDEX 573
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,146
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,76,81,98,248
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 392
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,528
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 248
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152,206
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 248
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Tow/Haul Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
10
574 INDEX
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,146,528,530
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,88
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . .
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 493
. . . . . 488
. . . . . 538
. . 248,486
. . . . . 559
. . . . . 140
. . . . . 140
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Compass/Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
MOPAR Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487,558
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Multi-Displacement Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . 379
INDEX 575
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,74,78
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 71,72,74,77
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490,533
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491,533
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485,486
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257,462
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 6,559
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
10
576 INDEX
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 399
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 221
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,124
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,378
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214,217
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 161
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Quadra-Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357,358
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio, Satellite (uconnect™ studios)
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . .
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...
...
..
...
...
...
...
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
406
323
320
159
509
204
118
228
INDEX 577
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 456
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 459
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 321
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,97
Satellite Radio (uconnect™ studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
10
578 INDEX
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,98
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 57
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,91
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,124
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21,256
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289,298
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
INDEX 579
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,250,528,530
Sirius Backseat TV™ (uconnect™ studios) . . . . . . 320
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407,408,464
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 163,167
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,343
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,348
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,378
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,161
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,161
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335,525
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214,217
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
10
580 INDEX
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 68 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,403,561
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Suspension, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,161
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 328
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 257
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399,400
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,161
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 399
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
INDEX 581
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Tow/Haul Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438,477
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350,511
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 208
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 23
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,528,530
10
582 INDEX
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 313
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400,436
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335,525
Video Entertainment System™
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,498
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,216,221
INDEX 583
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,326
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Windshield Wiper Blades
Windshield Wipers . . . . .
Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
496
155
156
159
10
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
291680.ps 11JK72-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 05/14/2010 06:18:00
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
11WK741-126-AG
11WK741-126-AE
Seventh
Edition
Fifth Edition
Printing in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement